WO2000072130A1 - Computer system interface surface with reference points - Google Patents

Computer system interface surface with reference points Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2000072130A1
WO2000072130A1 PCT/AU2000/000569 AU0000569W WO0072130A1 WO 2000072130 A1 WO2000072130 A1 WO 2000072130A1 AU 0000569 W AU0000569 W AU 0000569W WO 0072130 A1 WO0072130 A1 WO 0072130A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sensing device
data
tag
computer
computer system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/AU2000/000569
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Paul Lapstun
Kia Silverbrook
Original Assignee
Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from AUPQ0559A external-priority patent/AUPQ055999A0/en
Priority claimed from AUPQ1313A external-priority patent/AUPQ131399A0/en
Priority claimed from AUPQ3457A external-priority patent/AUPQ345799A0/en
Priority claimed from AUPQ4392A external-priority patent/AUPQ439299A0/en
Priority to IL14667200A priority Critical patent/IL146672A0/en
Priority to JP2000620457A priority patent/JP4647794B2/en
Priority to BR0010861-8A priority patent/BR0010861A/en
Priority to MXPA01012144A priority patent/MXPA01012144A/en
Priority to EP00929081A priority patent/EP1228418B1/en
Application filed by Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. filed Critical Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd.
Priority to DE60040610T priority patent/DE60040610D1/en
Priority to CA2374716A priority patent/CA2374716C/en
Priority to AU47304/00A priority patent/AU4730400A/en
Publication of WO2000072130A1 publication Critical patent/WO2000072130A1/en
Priority to IL146672A priority patent/IL146672A/en
Priority to HK03100899.9A priority patent/HK1048860A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V30/00Character recognition; Recognising digital ink; Document-oriented image-based pattern recognition
    • G06V30/10Character recognition
    • G06V30/14Image acquisition
    • G06V30/142Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments
    • G06V30/1423Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments the instrument generating sequences of position coordinates corresponding to handwriting
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F18/00Pattern recognition
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J13/00Devices or arrangements of selective printing mechanisms, e.g. ink-jet printers or thermal printers, specially adapted for supporting or handling copy material in short lengths, e.g. sheets
    • B41J13/10Sheet holders, retainers, movable guides, or stationary guides
    • B41J13/103Sheet holders, retainers, movable guides, or stationary guides for the sheet feeding section
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J13/00Devices or arrangements of selective printing mechanisms, e.g. ink-jet printers or thermal printers, specially adapted for supporting or handling copy material in short lengths, e.g. sheets
    • B41J13/10Sheet holders, retainers, movable guides, or stationary guides
    • B41J13/106Sheet holders, retainers, movable guides, or stationary guides for the sheet output section
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17513Inner structure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/1752Mounting within the printer
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/1752Mounting within the printer
    • B41J2/17523Ink connection
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17543Cartridge presence detection or type identification
    • B41J2/17546Cartridge presence detection or type identification electronically
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17553Outer structure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17556Means for regulating the pressure in the cartridge
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17563Ink filters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/21Ink jet for multi-colour printing
    • B41J2/2107Ink jet for multi-colour printing characterised by the ink properties
    • B41J2/2114Ejecting transparent or white coloured liquids, e.g. processing liquids
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C19/00Multi-step processes for making books
    • B42C19/02Multi-step processes for making books starting with single sheets
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C9/00Applying glue or adhesive peculiar to bookbinding
    • B42C9/0006Applying glue or adhesive peculiar to bookbinding by applying adhesive to a stack of sheets
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C9/00Applying glue or adhesive peculiar to bookbinding
    • B42C9/0081Applying glue or adhesive peculiar to bookbinding applying adhesive to individual sheets for binding them together
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H29/00Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles
    • B65H29/26Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles by dropping the articles
    • B65H29/34Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles by dropping the articles from supports slid from under the articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H37/00Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations
    • B65H37/04Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations for securing together articles or webs, e.g. by adhesive, stitching or stapling
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F16/00Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/016Input arrangements with force or tactile feedback as computer generated output to the user
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/0304Detection arrangements using opto-electronic means
    • G06F3/0317Detection arrangements using opto-electronic means in co-operation with a patterned surface, e.g. absolute position or relative movement detection for an optical mouse or pen positioned with respect to a coded surface
    • G06F3/0321Detection arrangements using opto-electronic means in co-operation with a patterned surface, e.g. absolute position or relative movement detection for an optical mouse or pen positioned with respect to a coded surface by optically sensing the absolute position with respect to a regularly patterned surface forming a passive digitiser, e.g. pen optically detecting position indicative tags printed on a paper sheet
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/033Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
    • G06F3/0354Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of 2D relative movements between the device, or an operating part thereof, and a plane or surface, e.g. 2D mice, trackballs, pens or pucks
    • G06F3/03545Pens or stylus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04883Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K17/00Methods or arrangements for effecting co-operative working between equipments covered by two or more of main groups G06K1/00 - G06K15/00, e.g. automatic card files incorporating conveying and reading operations
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/30Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks
    • G06Q20/34Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks using cards, e.g. integrated circuit [IC] cards or magnetic cards
    • G06Q20/346Cards serving only as information carrier of service
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/38Payment protocols; Details thereof
    • G06Q20/40Authorisation, e.g. identification of payer or payee, verification of customer or shop credentials; Review and approval of payers, e.g. check credit lines or negative lists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V30/00Character recognition; Recognising digital ink; Document-oriented image-based pattern recognition
    • G06V30/10Character recognition
    • G06V30/14Image acquisition
    • G06V30/1444Selective acquisition, locating or processing of specific regions, e.g. highlighted text, fiducial marks or predetermined fields
    • G06V30/1448Selective acquisition, locating or processing of specific regions, e.g. highlighted text, fiducial marks or predetermined fields based on markings or identifiers characterising the document or the area
    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F7/00Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus
    • G07F7/08Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means
    • G07F7/10Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means together with a coded signal, e.g. in the form of personal identification information, like personal identification number [PIN] or biometric data
    • G07F7/1008Active credit-cards provided with means to personalise their use, e.g. with PIN-introduction/comparison system
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • H04N1/00204Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a digital computer or a digital computer system, e.g. an internet server
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • H04N1/00204Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a digital computer or a digital computer system, e.g. an internet server
    • H04N1/00244Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a digital computer or a digital computer system, e.g. an internet server with a server, e.g. an internet server
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • H04N1/00326Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a data reading, recognizing or recording apparatus, e.g. with a bar-code apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/0035User-machine interface; Control console
    • H04N1/00352Input means
    • H04N1/00355Mark-sheet input
    • H04N1/00358Type of the scanned marks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/0035User-machine interface; Control console
    • H04N1/00352Input means
    • H04N1/00355Mark-sheet input
    • H04N1/00376Means for identifying a mark sheet or area
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00567Handling of original or reproduction media, e.g. cutting, separating, stacking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00962Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software
    • H04N1/00968Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software by scanning marks on a sheet
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/32101Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/32101Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N1/32106Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title separate from the image data, e.g. in a different computer file
    • H04N1/32122Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title separate from the image data, e.g. in a different computer file in a separate device, e.g. in a memory or on a display separate from image data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/32101Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N1/32128Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title attached to the image data, e.g. file header, transmitted message header, information on the same page or in the same computer file as the image
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/327Initiating, continuing or ending a single-mode communication; Handshaking therefor
    • H04N1/32765Initiating a communication
    • H04N1/32771Initiating a communication in response to a request, e.g. for a particular document
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/327Initiating, continuing or ending a single-mode communication; Handshaking therefor
    • H04N1/32765Initiating a communication
    • H04N1/32771Initiating a communication in response to a request, e.g. for a particular document
    • H04N1/32778Initiating a communication in response to a request, e.g. for a particular document using a mark-sheet or machine-readable code request
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42PINDEXING SCHEME RELATING TO BOOKS, FILING APPLIANCES OR THE LIKE
    • B42P2261/00Manufacturing; Forming
    • B42P2261/04Producing books by printing sheets in following order, e.g. for ordering via the Internet
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/12Digital output to print unit, e.g. line printer, chain printer
    • G06F3/1201Dedicated interfaces to print systems
    • G06F3/1202Dedicated interfaces to print systems specifically adapted to achieve a particular effect
    • G06F3/1203Improving or facilitating administration, e.g. print management
    • G06F3/1204Improving or facilitating administration, e.g. print management resulting in reduced user or operator actions, e.g. presetting, automatic actions, using hardware token storing data
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/12Digital output to print unit, e.g. line printer, chain printer
    • G06F3/1201Dedicated interfaces to print systems
    • G06F3/1223Dedicated interfaces to print systems specifically adapted to use a particular technique
    • G06F3/1237Print job management
    • G06F3/1265Printing by reference, e.g. retrieving document/image data for a job from a source mentioned in the job
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/12Digital output to print unit, e.g. line printer, chain printer
    • G06F3/1201Dedicated interfaces to print systems
    • G06F3/1278Dedicated interfaces to print systems specifically adapted to adopt a particular infrastructure
    • G06F3/1284Local printer device
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V30/00Character recognition; Recognising digital ink; Document-oriented image-based pattern recognition
    • G06V30/10Character recognition
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V30/00Character recognition; Recognising digital ink; Document-oriented image-based pattern recognition
    • G06V30/10Character recognition
    • G06V30/14Image acquisition
    • G06V30/142Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments
    • G06V30/1426Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments by sensing position defining codes on a support
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/0077Types of the still picture apparatus
    • H04N2201/0082Image hardcopy reproducer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3243Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document of type information, e.g. handwritten or text document
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3247Data linking a set of images to one another, e.g. sequence, burst or continuous capture mode
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3249Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document data relating to a linked page or object, e.g. hyperlink
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3269Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of machine readable codes or marks, e.g. bar codes or glyphs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3269Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of machine readable codes or marks, e.g. bar codes or glyphs
    • H04N2201/327Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of machine readable codes or marks, e.g. bar codes or glyphs which are undetectable to the naked eye, e.g. embedded codes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method and system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system
  • the invention has been developed primarily to provide a surface-based interface which allows a user to interact with networked information and to obtain interactive printed matter on demand via high-speed networked color printers Although the invention will largely be described herein with reference to this use, it will be appreciated that the invention is not limited to use in this field
  • PCT/AU00/00582 PCT/AU00/00587, PCT/AU00/00588, PCT/AU00/00589, PCT/AU00/00583, PCT/AU00/00593, PCT/AU00/00590.
  • PCT/AU00/00591 PCT/AU00/00592, PCT/AU00/00594, PCT/AU00/00595, PCT/AU00/00596, PCT/AUOO/00597, PCT/AU00/00598, PCT/AU00/00516, and PCT/AU00/00517
  • a user wishing to interact with a computer system usually does so using a display device such as a computer monitor and an input device such as a keyboard or a computer mouse Whilst such interfaces are useful, they are relatively bulky and non-portable, and can lack the immediacy and expressiveness afforded by a pen applied to paper Moreover, in many situations, paper is a more comfortable and convenient recording medium, due to its superior visual characteristics and its portability Nevertheless, information recorded on paper is generally not as accessible and malleable as information recorded on a computer system Furthermore, unlike a computer interface, a pen applied to paper generally lacks the ability to control computer software
  • a method of enabling user interaction with computer software running m a computer system including the steps of providing an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software, and coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and m the computer system (a) receiving indicating data from a sensmg device, the indicating data being indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, the indicative data being sensed when the sensing device is placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data,
  • the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, and step (b) includes using the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
  • the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data
  • the method then includes the step of receiving, in the computer system, the movement data, wherein step (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
  • a system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system including an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, the system being configured to, in the computer system
  • the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, the system being configured to use the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
  • the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface using at least some of the coded data.
  • the computer system is configured to receive the movement data, wherein (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
  • the coded data takes the form of tags disposed on the interface surface
  • the tags are p ⁇ nted onto a surface in the form of a piece of paper, and are configured to be read by a sensing device in the form of an optical sensing stylus
  • the tags are preferably p ⁇ nted using an ink that absorbs near infrared light but is substantially invisible to a human viewer under normal lighting conditions
  • a sensing end of the stylus close to the surface
  • one or more of the tags are imaged, interpreted and decoded to provide an indication of the identity of the region from which the tag was imaged, and a position of the sensing device in relation to the surface
  • This information is used to identify an interactive element, and software in an associated computer system is then operated on the basis of instructions associated with the interactive element
  • Figure 1 is a schematic of a the relationship between a sample p ⁇ nted netpage and its online page desc ⁇ ption
  • Figure 2 is a schematic view of a interaction between a netpage pen, a netpage p ⁇ nter, a netpage page server, and a netpage application server,
  • Figure 3 illustrates a collection of netpage servers and pnnters interconnected via a network
  • Figure 4 is a schematic view of a high-level structure of a p ⁇ nted netpage and its online page desc ⁇ ption
  • Figure 5 is a plan view showing a structure of a netpage tag
  • Figure 6 is a plan view showing a relationship between a set of the tags shown m Figure 5 and a field of view of a netpage sensing device in the form of a netpage pen
  • Figure 7 is a flowchart of a tag image processing and decoding algo ⁇ thm
  • Figure 8 is a perspective view of a netpage pen and its associated tag-sensing field-of-view cone
  • Figure 9 is a perspective exploded view of the netpage pen shown in Figure 8
  • Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a pen controller for the netpage pen shown m
  • Figures 8 and 9 Figure 11 is a perspective view of a wall-mounted netpage p ⁇ nter
  • Figure 12 is a section through the length of the netpage p ⁇ nter of Figure 11
  • Figure 12a is an enlarged portion of Figure 12 showing a section of the duplexed p ⁇ nt engines and glue wheel assembly
  • Figure 13 is a detailed view of the ink cart ⁇ dge, ink, air and glue paths, and p ⁇ nt engines of the netpage p ⁇ nter of Figures 11 and 12,
  • Figure 14 is a schematic block diagram of a p ⁇ nter controller for the netpage p ⁇ nter shown m Figures 11 and 12,
  • Figure 15 is a schematic block diagram of duplexed p ⁇ nt engine controllers and MemjetTM pnntheads associated with the p ⁇ nter controller shown m Figure 14,
  • Figure 16 is a schematic block diagram of the p ⁇ nt engine controller shown Figures 14 and 15, - 4 -
  • Figure 17 is a perspective view of a single MemjetTM p ⁇ nting element, as used in, for example, the netpage p ⁇ nter of
  • Figure 18 is a perspective view of a small part of an array of MemjetTM pnnting elements
  • Figure 19 is a senes of perspective views illustrating the operating cycle of the MemjetTM pnnting element shown in Figure 13,
  • Figure 20 is a perspective view of a short segment of a pagewidth MemjetTM pnnthead
  • Figure 21 is a schematic view of a user class diagram
  • Figure 22 is a schematic view of a p ⁇ nter class diagram
  • Figure 23 is a schematic view of a pen class diagram
  • Figure 24 is a schematic view of an application class diagram
  • Figure 25 is a schematic view of a document and page desc ⁇ ption class diagram
  • Figure 26 is a schematic view of a document and page ownership class diagram
  • Figure 27 is a schematic view of a terminal element specialization class diagram
  • Figure 28 is a schematic view of a static element specialization class diagram
  • Figure 29 is a schematic view of a hyperlink element class diagram
  • Figure 30 is a schematic view of a hyperlink element specialization class diagram
  • Figure 31 is a schematic view of a hyperlmked group class diagram
  • Figure 32 is a schematic view of a form class diagram
  • Figure 33 is a schematic view of a digital ink class diagram
  • Figure 34 is a schematic view of a field element specialization class diagram
  • Figure 35 is a schematic view of a checkbox field class diagram
  • Figure 36 is a schematic view of a text field class diagram
  • Figure 37 is a schematic view of a signature field class diagram
  • Figure 38 is a flowchart of an input processing algo ⁇ thm
  • Figure 38a is a detailed flowchart of one step of the flowchart of Figure 38
  • Figure 39 is a schematic view of a page server command element class diagram
  • Figure 40 is a schematic view of a resource desc ⁇ ption class diagram
  • Figure 41 is a schematic view of a favo ⁇ tes list class diagram
  • Figure 42 is a schematic view of a history list class diagram
  • Figure 43 is a schematic view of a subsc ⁇ ption delivery protocol
  • Figure 44 is a schematic view of a hyperlink request class diagram
  • Figure 45 is a schematic view of a hyperlink activation protocol
  • Figure 46 is a schematic view of a form submission protocol
  • Figure 47 is a schematic view of a commission payment protocol
  • Figure 48 is a schematic view of a set of radial wedges making up a symbol
  • Figure 49 is a schematic view of a nng A and B symbol allocation scheme
  • Figure 50 is a schematic view of a first ⁇ ng C and D symbol allocation scheme
  • Figure 51 is a schematic view of a second ⁇ ng C and D symbol allocation scheme
  • Figure 52 is a schematic view of a t ⁇ angular tag packing
  • Figure 53 is a perspective view of an lcosahedron
  • Figure 54 is a perspective view of an lcosahedral geodesic with frequency 3
  • Figure 55 is a schematic view of a minimum tag spacing
  • Figure 56 is a schematic view of a minimum tag spacing which avoids overlap, - 5 -
  • Figure 57 is a schematic view of a first tag insertion case
  • Figure 58 is a schematic view of a second tag insertion case
  • Figure 59 is a schematic view of a third tag insertion case
  • Figure 60 is a schematic view of a fourth tag insertion case
  • Figure 61 is a schematic view of a pen onentation relative to a surface
  • Figure 62 is a schematic view of a pen pitch geometry
  • Figure 63 is a schematic view of a pen roll geometry
  • Figure 64 is a schematic view of a pen coordinate space showing physical and optical axes of a pen
  • Figure 65 is a schematic view of a curved nib geometry
  • Figure 66 is a schematic view of an interaction between sampling frequency and tag frequency
  • Figure 67 is a table containing equations numbered 1 to 10,
  • Figure 68 is a table containing equations numbered 11 to 20,
  • Figure 69 is a table containing equations numbered 21 to 26,
  • Figure 70 is a table containing equations numbered 27 to 34
  • Figure 71 is a table containing equations numbered 35 to 41 ,
  • Figure 72 is a table containing equations numbered 42 to 44,
  • Figure 73 is a table containing equations numbered 45 to 47,
  • Figure 74 is a table containing equations numbered 48 to 51 ,
  • Figure 75 is a table containing equations numbered 52 to 54
  • Figure 76 is a table containing equations numbered 55 to 57
  • Figure 77 is a table containing equations numbered 58 to 59,
  • Figure 78 is a table containing equations numbered 60 to 63,
  • Figure 79 is a table containing equations numbered 64 to 74,
  • Figure 80 is a table containing equations numbered 75 to 86
  • Figure 81 is a table containing equations numbered 87 to 99
  • Figure 82 is a table containing equations numbered 100 to 111 ,
  • Figure 83 is a table containing equations numbered 112 to 120,
  • Figure 84 is a table containing equations numbered 121 to 129,
  • Figure 85 is a table containing a set of degenerate forms of equations 64 to 71
  • Figure 86 is a first part of a table containing conditions and special handling for zero pitch and zero roll
  • Figure 87 is a the second part of the table of Figure 86
  • MemjetTM is a trade mark of Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd, Australia
  • the invention is configured to work with the netpage networked computer system, a detailed overview of which follows It will be appreciated that not every implementation will necessa ⁇ ly embody all or even most of the specific details and extensions discussed below in relation to the basic system However, the system is desc ⁇ bed m its most complete form to reduce the need for external reference when attempting to understand the context in which the preferred embodiments and aspects of the present invention operate
  • the prefe ⁇ ed form of the netpage system employs a computer interface in the form of a mapped surface, that is, a physical surface which contains references to a map of the surface maintained in a computer system
  • the map references can be quened by an approp ⁇ ate sensing device
  • the map references may be encoded visibly or invisibly, and defined in such a way that a local query on the mapped surface yields an unambiguous map reference both within the map and among different maps
  • the computer system can contain information about features on the mapped surface, and such information can be retneved based on - 6 - map references supplied by a sensing device used with the mapped surface
  • the information thus ret ⁇ eved can take the form of actions which are initiated by the computer system on behalf of the operator in response to the operator's interaction with the surface features
  • the netpage system relies on the production of, and human interaction with, netpages
  • netpages These are pages of text, graphics and images p ⁇ nted on ordinary paper, but which work like interactive web pages
  • Information is encoded on each page using ink which is substantially invisible to the unaided human eye
  • the ink, however, and thereby the coded data, can be sensed by an optically imaging pen and transmitted to the netpage system
  • buttons and hyperlinks on each page can be clicked with the pen to request information from the network or to signal preferences to a network server
  • text wntten by hand on a netpage is automatically recognized and converted to computer text in the netpage system, allowing forms to be filled in
  • signatures recorded on a netpage are automatically venfied, allowing e-commerce transactions to be securely authonzed
  • a pnnted netpage 1 can represent a interactive form which can be filled by the user both physically, on the p ⁇ nted page, and "electronically", via communication between the pen and the netpage system
  • the example shows a "Request" form containing name and address fields and a submit button
  • the netpage consists of graphic data 2 pnnted using visible ink, and coded data 3 pnnted as a collection of tags 4 using invisible ink
  • the co ⁇ esponding page desc ⁇ ption 5 stored on the netpage network, desc ⁇ bes the individual elements of the netpage In particular it descnbes the type and spatial extent (zone) of each interactive element (l e text field or button in the example), to allow the netpage system to correctly interpret input via the netpage
  • the submit button 6, for example, has a zone 7 which co ⁇ esponds to the spatial extent of the co ⁇ esponding graphic 8
  • the netpage pen 101 works in conjunction with a netpage p ⁇ nter 601, an Internet-connected pnnting appliance for home, office or mobile use
  • the pen is wireless and communicates securely with the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link 9
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter 601 a prefe ⁇ ed form of which is shown m Figures 11 to 13 and descnbed in more detail below, is able to deliver, penodically or on demand, personalized newspapers, magazines, catalogs, brochures and other publications, all pnnted at high quality as interactive netpages
  • the netpage pnnter is an appliance which can be, for example, wall-mounted adjacent to an area where the morning news is first consumed, such as a user's kitchen, near a breakfast table, or near the household's point of departure for the day It also comes in tabletop, desktop, portable
  • Netpages p ⁇ nted at their point of consumption combine the ease-of-use of paper with the timeliness and interactivity of an interactive medium
  • the netpage pen 101 interacts with the coded data on a pnnted netpage 1 and communicates, via a short-range radio link 9, the interaction to a netpage pnnter
  • the pnnter 601 sends the interaction to the relevant netpage page server 10 for interpretation
  • the page server sends a co ⁇ esponding message to application computer software running on a netpage application server 13
  • the application server may m turn send a response which is p ⁇ nted on the onginating p ⁇ nter
  • the netpage system is made considerably more convenient the prefe ⁇ ed embodiment by being used in conjunction with high-speed microelectromecha cal system (MEMS) based inkjet (MemjetTM) pnnters
  • MEMS microelectromecha cal system
  • MemjetTM inkjet
  • a netpage publication has the physical charactenstics of a traditional newsmagazine, such as a set of letter- size glossy pages pnnted in full color on both sides, bound together for easy navigation and comfortable handling
  • the netpage pnnter exploits the growing availability of broadband Internet access Cable service is available to 95% of households m the United States, and cable modem service offenng broadband Internet access is already available to 20% of these
  • the netpage pnnter can also operate with slower connections, but with longer delivery times and lower image quality Indeed, the netpage system can be enabled using existing consumer inkjet and laser pnnters, although the system will operate more slowly and will therefore be less acceptable from a consumer's point of view
  • the netpage system is hosted on a pnvate intranet
  • the netpage system is hosted on a single computer or computer-enabled device, such as a p ⁇ nter
  • Netpage publication servers 14 on the netpage network are configured to deliver pnnt-quahty publications to netpage pnnters
  • Pe ⁇ odical publications are delivered automatically to subsc ⁇ bing netpage pnnters via pointcastmg and multicasting Internet protocols
  • Personalized publications are filtered and formatted according to individual user profiles
  • a netpage pnnter can be configured to support any number of pens, and a pen can work with any number of netpage pnnters In the prefe ⁇ ed implementation, each netpage pen has a unique identifier
  • a household may have a collection of colored netpage pens, one assigned to each member of the family This allows each user to maintain a distinct profile with respect to a netpage publication server or application server
  • a netpage pen can also be registered with a netpage registration server 11 and linked to one or more payment card accounts This allows e-commerce payments to be securely authonzed using the netpage pen
  • the netpage registration server compares the signature captured by the netpage pen with a previously registered signature, allowing it to authenticate the user's identity to an e-commerce server
  • Other biometrics can also be used to venfy identity
  • a version of the netpage pen includes fingerp ⁇ nt scanning, venfied in a similar way by the netpage registration server
  • netpage pnnter may deliver penodicals such as the morning newspaper without user intervention, it can be configured never to deliver unsolicited junk mail In its prefe ⁇ ed form, it only delivers penodicals from subscnbed or otherwise authonzed sources In this respect, the netpage p ⁇ nter is unlike a fax machine or e-mail account which is visible to any junk mailer who knows the telephone number or email address 1 NETPAGE SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
  • UML Unified Modeling Language
  • a class diagram consists of a set of object classes connected by relationships, and two kinds of relationships are of interest here associations and generalizations
  • An association represents some kind of relationship between objects, I e between instances of classes A generalization relates actual classes, and can be understood in the following way if a class is thought of as the set of all objects of that class, and class A is a generalization of class B, then B is simply a subset of A
  • the UML does not directly support second-order modelling - 1 e classes of classes
  • Each class is drawn as a rectangle labelled with the name of the class It contains a list of the attnbutes of the class, separated from the name by a honzontal line, and a list of the operations of the class, separated from the att ⁇ bute list by a honzontal line In the class diagrams which follow, however, operations are never modelled
  • An association is drawn as a line joining two classes, optionally labelled at either end with the multiplicity of the association The default multiplicity is one
  • An aste ⁇ sk (*) indicates a multiplicity of "many", l e zero or more
  • Each association is optionally labelled with its name, and is also optionally labelled at either end with the role of the co ⁇ esponding class
  • An open diamond indicates an aggregation association ("ls-part-of '), and is drawn at the aggregator end of the association line
  • any class which is duplicated is shown with a dashed outline in all but the main diagram which defines it It is shown with attnbutes only where it is defined 1.1 NETPAGES
  • Netpages are the foundation on which a netpage network is built They provide a paper-based user interface to published information and interactive services
  • a netpage consists of a p ⁇ nted page (or other surface region) invisibly tagged with references to an online - 8 - desc ⁇ ption of the page
  • the online page desc ⁇ ption is maintained persistently by a netpage page server
  • the page desc ⁇ ption desc ⁇ bes the visible layout and content of the page, including text, graphics and images It also desc ⁇ bes the input elements on the page, including buttons, hyperlinks, and input fields
  • a netpage allows markings made with a netpage pen on its surface to be simultaneously captured and processed by the netpage system
  • Multiple netpages can share the same page descnption However, to allow input through otherwise identical pages to be distinguished, each netpage is assigned a unique page identifier This page ID has sufficient precision to distinguish between a very large number of netpages
  • Each reference to the page descnption is encoded m a pnnted tag
  • the tag identifies the unique page on which it appears, and thereby indirectly identifies the page desc ⁇ ption
  • the tag also identifies its own position on the page Characte ⁇ stics of the tags are desc ⁇ bed m more detail below
  • Tags are p ⁇ nted in infrared-absorptive ink on any substrate which is infrared-reflective, such as ordinary paper Near-infrared wavelengths are invisible to the human eye but are easily sensed by a solid-state image sensor with an approp ⁇ ate filter
  • a tag is sensed by an area image sensor in the netpage pen, and the tag data is transmitted to the netpage system via the nearest netpage p ⁇ nter
  • the pen is wireless and communicates with the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link
  • Tags are sufficiently small and densely a ⁇ anged that the pen can reliably image at least one tag even on a single click on the page It is important that the pen recognize the page ID and position on every interaction with the page, since the interaction is stateless Tags are e ⁇ or-co ⁇ ectably encoded to make them partially tolerant to surface damage
  • the netpage page server maintains a unique page instance for each p ⁇ nted netpage, allowing it to maintain a distinct set of user-supplied values for input fields in the page desc ⁇ ption for each p ⁇ nted netpage
  • the relationship between the page desc ⁇ ption, the page instance, and the pnnted netpage is shown in Figure 4
  • the page instance is associated with both the netpage p ⁇ nter which p ⁇ nted it and, if known, the netpage user who requested it
  • each tag identifies the region in which it appears, and the location of that tag withm the region
  • a tag may also contain flags which relate to the region as a whole or to the tag
  • One or more flag bits may, for example, signal a tag sensing device to provide feedback indicative of a function associated with the immediate area of the tag, without the sensing device having to refer to a descnption of the region
  • a netpage pen may, for example, illuminate an "active area" LED when in the zone of a hyperlink
  • each tag contains an easily recognized inva ⁇ ant structure which aids initial detection, and which assists m minimizing the effect of any warp induced by the surface or by the sensing process
  • the tags preferably tile the entire page, and are sufficiently small and densely a ⁇ anged that the pen can reliably image at least one tag even on a single click on the page It is important that the pen recognize the page ID and position on every interaction with the page, since the interaction is stateless
  • the region to which a tag refers coincides with an entire page, and the region ID encoded in the tag is therefore synonymous with the page ID of the page on which the tag appears
  • the region to which a tag refers can be an arbitrary subregion of a page or other surface For example, it can coincide with the zone of an interactive element, in which case the region ID can directly identify the interactive element Table 1.
  • Each tag contains 120 bits of information, typically allocated as shown in Table 1 Assuming a maximum tag density of 64 per square inch, a 16-bit tag ID supports a region size of up to 1024 square inches Larger regions can be mapped continuously without increasing the tag ID precision simply by using abutting regions and maps The 100-bit region ID allows 2 100 (-10 30 or a million t ⁇ llion tnlhon) different regions to be uniquely identified
  • the 120 bits of tag data are redundantly encoded using a (15, 5) Reed-Solomon code
  • the (15, 5) code allows up to 5 symbol e ⁇ ors to be co ⁇ ected per codeword, l e it is tolerant of a symbol e ⁇ or rate of up to 33% per codeword
  • Each 4-bit symbol is represented a spatially coherent way in the tag, and the symbols of the six codewords are interleaved spatially within the tag This ensures that a burst e ⁇ or (an e ⁇ or affecting multiple spatially adjacent bits) damages a minimum number of symbols overall and a minimum number of symbols in any one codeword, thus maximising the likelihood that the burst e ⁇ or can be fully co ⁇ ected
  • the physical representation of the tag shown in Figure 5, includes fixed target structures 15, 16, 17 and vanable data areas 18
  • the fixed target structures allow a sensing device such as the netpage pen to detect the tag and infer its three-dimensional o ⁇ entation relative to the sensor
  • the data areas contain representations of the individual bits of the encoded tag data
  • the tag is rendered at a resolution of 256x256 dots When pnnted at 1600 dots per mch this yields a tag with a diameter of about 4 mm At this resolution the tag is designed to be su ⁇ ounded by a "quiet area" of radius 16 dots Since the quiet area is also contnubbed by adjacent tags, it only adds 16 dots to the effective diameter of the tag
  • the tag includes six target structures a detection nng 15, an o ⁇ entation axis target 16, and four perspective targets 17
  • the detection nng 15 allows the sensing device to initially detect the tag 4
  • the ⁇ ng is easy to detect because it is rotationally inva ⁇ ant and because a simple co ⁇ ection of its aspect ratio removes most of the effects of perspective distortion
  • the o ⁇ entation axis 16 allows the sensing device to determine the approximate planar o ⁇ entation of the tag due to the yaw of the sensor
  • the o ⁇ entation axis is skewed to yield a unique o ⁇ entation
  • the four perspective targets 17 allow the sensing device to infer an accurate two-dimensional perspective transform of the tag and hence an accurate three-dimensional position and onentation of the tag relative to the sensor
  • each data bit is represented by a radial wedge 510 in the form of an area bounded by two radial lines 512, a radially inner arc 514 and a radially outer arc 516
  • Each wedge 510 has a minimum dimension of 8 dots at 1600 dpi and is designed so that its base (l e its inner arc 514), is at least equal to this minimum dimension
  • the radial height of the wedge 510 is always equal to the minimum dimension
  • Each 4-bit data symbol is represented by an a ⁇ ay 518 of 2x2 wedges 510, as best shown m Figure 48
  • the 15 4-bit data symbols of each of the six codewords are allocated to the four concentnc symbol ⁇ ngs 18a to 18d, shown Figure 5, in interleaved fashion as shown in Figures 49 to 51 Symbols of first to sixth codewords 520- 525 are allocated alternately m circular progression around the tag - 10 -
  • the sensing device In order to support "single-click" interaction with a tagged region via a sensing device, the sensing device must be able to see at least one entire tag in its field of view no matter where in the region or at what o ⁇ entation it is positioned The required diameter of the field of view of the sensing device is therefore a function of the size and spacing of the tags
  • Figure 7 While a captured image is being acquired from the image sensor, the dynamic range of the image is determined (at 20) The center of the range is then chosen as the binary threshold for the image 21 The image is then thresholded and segmented into connected pixel regions (l e shapes 23) (at 22) Shapes which are too small to represent tag target structures are discarded The size and centroid of each shape is also computed Binary shape moments 25 are then computed (at 24) for each shape, and these provide the basis for subsequently locating target structures Central shape moments are by their nature mvanant of position, and can be easily made mvanant of scale, aspect ratio and rotation
  • the ⁇ ng target structure 15 is the first to be located (at 26)
  • a ⁇ ng has the advantage of being very well behaved when perspective-distorted Matching proceeds by aspect-normalizing and rotation-normalizing each shape's moments Once its second-order moments are normalized the ⁇ ng is easy to recognize even if the perspective distortion was significant
  • the ⁇ ng's ongmal aspect and rotation 27 together provide a useful approximation of the perspective transform
  • the axis target structure 16 is the next to be located (at 28)
  • Matching proceeds by applying the ⁇ ng's normalizations to each shape's moments, and rotation-normalizing the resulting moments Once its second-order moments are normalized the axis target is easily recognized Note that one third order moment is required to disambiguate the two possible o ⁇ entations of the axis
  • the shape is deliberately skewed to one side to make this possible
  • the axis target's ongmal rotation provides a useful approximation of the tag's rotation due to pen yaw 29
  • the four perspective target structures 17 are the last to be located (at 30) Good estimates of their positions are computed based on their known spatial relationships to the ⁇ ng and axis targets, the aspect and rotation of the ⁇ ng, and the rotation of the axis Matching proceeds
  • each of the six 60-bit Reed-Solomon codewords is - 11 - decoded (at 38) to yield 20 decoded bits 39, or 120 decoded bits in total Note that the codeword symbols are sampled in codeword order, so that codewords are implicitly de-interleaved dunng the sampling process
  • the nng target 15 is only sought in a subarea of the image whose relationship to the image guarantees that the nng, if found, is part of a complete tag If a complete tag is not found and successfully decoded, then no pen position is recorded for the cu ⁇ ent frame Given adequate processing power and ideally a non-minimal field of view 193, an alternative strategy involves seeking another tag in the cu ⁇ ent image
  • the obtained tag data indicates the identity of the region containing the tag and the position of the tag within the region
  • An accurate position 35 of the pen nib in the region, as well as the overall o ⁇ entation 35 of the pen, is then infe ⁇ ed (at 34) from the perspective transform 33 observed on the tag and the known spatial relationship between the pen's physical axis and the pen's optical axis
  • Decoding a tag results m a region ID, a tag ID, and a tag-relative pen transform
  • a tag map a function which maps each tag ID in a tagged region to a co ⁇ esponding location
  • the tag map class diagram is shown in Figure 22, as part of the netpage p ⁇ nter class diagram
  • a tag map reflects the scheme used to tile the surface region with tags, and this can vary according to surface type When multiple tagged regions share the same tiling scheme and the same tag numbe ⁇ ng scheme, they can also share the same tag map
  • the tag map for a region must be ret ⁇ evable via the region ID
  • the tag map can be retrieved, the tag ID can be translated into an absolute tag location within the region, and the tag-relative pen location can be added to the tag location to yield an absolute pen location within the region
  • a location-indicating tag contains a tag ID which, when translated through the tag map associated with the tagged region, yields a unique tag location within the region
  • the tag-relative location of the pen is added to this tag location to yield the location of the pen withm the region
  • This m turn is used to determine the location of the pen relative to a user interface element in the page descnption associated with the region Not only is the user interface element itself identified, but a location relative to the user interface element is identified
  • Location-indicating tags therefore trivially support the capture of an absolute pen path in the zone of a particular user interface element
  • An object-indicating tag contains a tag ID which directly identifies a user interface element in the page descnption associated with the region All the tags m the zone of the user interface element identify the user interface element, making them all identical and therefore indistinguishable Object-indicating tags do not, therefore, support the capture of an absolute pen path They do, however, support the capture of a relative pen path So long as the position sampling frequency exceeds twice the encountered tag frequency, the displacement from one sampled pen position to the next within a stroke can be unambiguously determined
  • the illustration m Figure 60 shows four tags 500 and a one-dimensional stroke of six sample positions 582 - 12 - which satisfy EQ 38 Possible aliases 584 of the sample positions are also shown From inspection, if the distance from one sample position to the next is ⁇ s , then the distance from a sample position to the alias of the next sample position exceeds ⁇ s
  • the sampling wavelength ⁇ s must be less than 235 mm If the temporal sampling frequency is 100 Hz as required for accurate handw ⁇ ting recognition, then the pen speed must be less than 235 mm/s to satisfy EQ 38
  • the tags function m cooperation with associated visual elements on the netpage as user interactive elements in that a user can interact with the p ⁇ nted page using an approp ⁇ ate sensing device in order for tag data to be read by the sensing device and for an approp ⁇ ate response to be generated in the netpage system 1.3 DOCUMENT AND PAGE DESCRIPTIONS
  • FIG. 25 and 26 A prefe ⁇ ed embodiment of a document and page descnption class diagram is shown in Figures 25 and 26
  • a document is descnbed at three levels
  • the document 836 has a hierarchical structure whose terminal elements 839 are associated with content objects 840 such as text objects, text style objects, image objects, etc
  • content objects 840 such as text objects, text style objects, image objects, etc
  • the document is paginated and otherwise formatted Formatted terminal elements 835 will in some cases be associated with content objects which are different from those associated with their conespondmg terminal elements, particularly where the content objects are style-related
  • Each p ⁇ nted instance of a document and page is also desc ⁇ bed separately, to allow input captured through a particular page instance 830 to be recorded separately from input captured through other mstances of the same page desc ⁇ ption
  • the presence of the most abstract document desc ⁇ ption on the page server allows a user to request a copy of a
  • a formatted document 834 consists of a set of formatted page desc ⁇ ptions 5, each of which consists of a set of formatted terminal elements 835
  • Each formatted element has a spatial extent or zone 58 on the page This defines the active area of input elements such as hyperlinks and input fields
  • a document instance 831 co ⁇ esponds to a formatted document 834 It consists of a set of page instances 830, each of which co ⁇ esponds to a page desc ⁇ ption 5 of the formatted document Each page instance 830 descnbes a single unique p ⁇ nted netpage 1, and records the page ID 50 of the netpage A page instance is not part of a document instance if it represents a copy of a page requested isolation
  • a page instance consists of a set of terminal element instances 832 An element instance only exists if it records instance-specific information Thus, a hyperlink instance exists for a hyperlink element because it records a transaction ID 55 which is specific to the page instance, and a field instance exists for a field element because it records input specific to the page instance An element instance does not exist, however, for static elements such as textflows
  • a terminal element can be a static element 843, a hyperlink element 844, a field element 845 or a page server command element 846, as shown m Figure 27
  • a static element 843 can be a style element 847 with an associated style object 854, a textflow element 848 with an associated styled text object 855, an image element 849 with an associated image element 856, a graphic element 850 with an associated graphic object 857, a video clip element 851 with an associated video clip object 858, an audio clip element 852 with an associated audio clip object 859, or a scnpt element 853 with an associated scnpt
  • a page instance has a background field 833 which is used to record any digital ink captured on the page which does not apply to a specific input element
  • a tag map 811 is associated with each page instance to allow tags on - 13 - the page to be translated into locations on the page
  • a netpage network consists of a distnaded set of netpage page servers 10, netpage registration servers 11, netpage ID servers 12, netpage application servers 13, netpage publication servers 14, and netpage pnnters 601 connected via a network 19 such as the Internet, as shown in Figure 3
  • the netpage registration server 11 is a server which records relationships between users, pens, pnnters, applications and publications, and thereby autho ⁇ zes vanous network activities It authenticates users and acts as a signing proxy on behalf of authenticated users in application transactions It also provides handwnting recognition services
  • a netpage page server 10 maintains persistent information about page desc ⁇ ptions and page instances
  • the netpage network includes any number of page servers, each handling a subset of page instances Since a page server also maintains user input values for each page instance, clients such as netpage pnnters send netpage input directly to the appropnate page server The page server inte ⁇ rets any such input relative to the desc ⁇ ption of the co ⁇ esponding page
  • a netpage ID server 12 allocates document IDs 51 on demand, and provides load-balancing of page servers via its ID allocation scheme
  • a netpage pnnter uses the Internet Distn Published Name System (DNS), or similar, to resolve a netpage page ID 50 into the network address of the netpage page server handling the co ⁇ esponding page instance
  • DNS Internet Distn Published Name System
  • a netpage application server 13 is a server which hosts interactive netpage applications
  • a netpage publication server 14 is an application server which publishes netpage documents to netpage pnnters They are desc ⁇ bed in detail in Section 2
  • Netpage servers can be hosted on a va ⁇ ety of network server platforms from manufacturers such as IBM,
  • Hewlett-Packard, and Sun Multiple netpage servers can run concu ⁇ ently on a single host, and a single server can be dist ⁇ aded over a number of hosts
  • Some or all of the functionality provided by netpage servers, and in particular the functionality provided by the ID server and the page server, can also be provided directly in a netpage appliance such as a netpage p ⁇ nter, in a computer workstation, or on a local network
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter 601 is an appliance which is registered with the netpage system and p ⁇ nts netpage documents on demand and via subsc ⁇ ption
  • Each p ⁇ nter has a unique p ⁇ nter ID 62, and is connected to the netpage network via a network such as the Internet, ideally via a broadband connection
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter contains no persistent storage
  • the network is the computer
  • Netpages function interactively across space and time with the help of the distnubbed netpage page servers 10, independently of particular netpage pnnters
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter receives subscnbed netpage documents from netpage publication servers 14 Each document is dist ⁇ ubbed in two parts the page layouts, and the actual text and image objects which populate the pages Because of personalization, page layouts are typically specific to a particular subscnber and so are pomtcast to the subscnber's p ⁇ nter via the approp ⁇ ate page server Text and image objects, on the other hand, are typically shared with other subsc ⁇ bers, and so are multicast to all subsc ⁇ bers' pnnters and the approp ⁇ ate page servers
  • the netpage publication server optimizes the segmentation of document content into pointcasts and multicasts After receiving the pomtcast of a document's page layouts, the pnnter knows which multicasts, if any, to listen to
  • the p ⁇ nter Once the p ⁇ nter has received the complete page layouts and objects that define the document to be p ⁇ nted, it can p ⁇ nt the document
  • the pnnter rastenzes and pnnts odd and even pages simultaneously on both sides of the sheet It contains duplexed pnnt engine controllers 760 and p ⁇ nt engines utilizing MemjetTM pnntheads 350 for this pu ⁇ ose - 14 -
  • the pnnting process consists of two decoupled stages rastenzation of page desc ⁇ ptions, and expansion and pnnting of page images
  • the raster image processor (RIP) consists of one or more standard DSPs 757 running in parallel
  • the duplexed pnnt engine controllers consist of custom processors which expand, dither and pnnt page images in real time, synchronized with the operation of the pnntheads in the pnnt engines
  • Pnnters not enabled for IR pnnting have the option to pnnt tags using IR-abso ⁇ tive black ink, although this restricts tags to otherwise empty areas of the page Although such pages have more limited functionality than IR-pnnted pages, they are still classed as netpages
  • the tag map 811 which descnbes the tag tiling scheme actually used to p ⁇ nt a document becomes associated with that document so that the document's tags can be co ⁇ ectly mte ⁇ reted
  • Figure 2 shows the netpage p ⁇ nter class diagram, reflecting p ⁇ nter-related information maintained by a registration server 11 on the netpage network
  • the netpage system can operate using pnnters made with a wide range of digital p ⁇ nting technologies, including thermal inkjet, piezoelectnc inkjet, laser electrophotographic, and others
  • pnnters made with a wide range of digital p ⁇ nting technologies, including thermal inkjet, piezoelectnc inkjet, laser electrophotographic, and others
  • thermal inkjet piezoelectnc inkjet
  • laser electrophotographic and others
  • MemjetTM is a drop-on-demand inkjet technology that inco ⁇ orates pagewidth pnntheads fabncated using microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) technology
  • Figure 17 shows a single pnnting element 300 of a MemjetTM pnnthead
  • the netpage wallpnnter incorporates 168960 p ⁇ nting elements 300 to form a 1600 dpi pagewidth duplex p ⁇ nter
  • This p ⁇ nter simultaneously p ⁇ nts cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and infrared inks as well as paper conditioner and ink fixative
  • the p ⁇ nting element 300 is approximately 110 microns long by 32 microns wide A ⁇ ays of these pnnting elements are formed on a silicon substrate 301 that inco ⁇ orates CMOS logic, data transfer, timing, and d ⁇ ve circuits (not shown)
  • Major elements of the p ⁇ nting element 300 are the nozzle 302, the nozzle nm 303, the nozzle chamber 304, the fluidic seal 305, the ink channel nm 306, the lever arm 307, the active actuator beam pair 308, the passive actuator - 15 - beam pair 309, the active actuator anchor 310, the passive actuator anchor 311, and the ink mlet 312
  • the active actuator beam pair 308 is mechanically joined to the passive actuator beam pair 309 at the join 319 Both beams pairs are anchored at their respective anchor points 310 and 311
  • the combination of elements 308, 309, 310, 311, and 319 form a cantilevered electrothermal bend actuator 320
  • Figure 18 shows a small part of an array of p ⁇ nting elements 300, including a cross section 315 of a pnntmg element 300 The cross section 315 is shown without ink, to clearly show the mk inlet 312 that passes through the silicon wafer 301
  • Figures 19(a), 190)) and 19(c) show the operating cycle of a MemjetTM pnnting element 300
  • Figure 19(a) shows the quiescent position of the ink meniscus 316 p ⁇ or to p ⁇ nting an ink droplet Ink is retained in the nozzle chamber by surface tension at the ink meniscus 316 and at the fluidic seal 305 formed between the nozzle chamber 304 and the ink channel nm 306
  • the pnnthead CMOS circuitry distnbutes data from the p ⁇ nt engine controller to the co ⁇ ect p ⁇ nting element, latches the data, and buffers the data to d ⁇ ve the electrodes 318 of the active actuator beam pair 308
  • Joule heating causes the beam pair 308 to expand
  • the passive actuator beam pair 309 is not heated, it does not expand, resulting in a stress difference between the two beam pairs
  • This stress difference is partially resolved by the cantilevered end of the electrothermal bend actuator 320 bending towards the substrate 301
  • the lever arm 307 transmits this movement to the nozzle chamber 304
  • the nozzle chamber 304 moves about two microns to the position shown in Figure 19(b) This increases the ink pressure, forcing ink 321 out of the nozzle 302, and causing the ink meniscus 316 to bulge
  • Figure 20 shows a segment of a pnnthead 350 In a netpage p ⁇ nter, the length of the pnnthead is the full width of the paper (typically 210 mm) in the direction 351 The segment shown is 0 4 mm long (about 02% of a complete pnnthead) When p ⁇ nting, the paper is moved past the fixed pnnthead in the direction 352
  • the pnnthead has 6 rows of interdigitated p ⁇ nting elements 300, p ⁇ nting the six colors or types of ink supplied by the ink inlets 312
  • a nozzle guard wafer 330 is attached to the pnnthead substrate 301 for each nozzle 302 there is a co ⁇ esponding nozzle guard hole 331 through which the ink droplets are fired To prevent the nozzle guard holes 331 from becoming blocked by paper fibers or other deb ⁇ s, filtered air is pumped through the air inlets 332 and out of the nozzle guard holes du ⁇ ng p ⁇ nting To prevent ink 321 from drying, the nozzle guard is sealed while the pnnter is idle 1.6
  • the Netpage Pen The active sensing device of the netpage system is typically a pen 101, which, using its embedded controller
  • the system is able to sense when the nib is in contact with the surface, and the pen is able to sense tags at a sufficient rate to capture human handwnting (I e at 200 dpi or greater and 100 Hz or faster)
  • Information captured by the pen is encrypted and wirelessly transmitted to the pnnter (or base station), the pnnter or base station inte ⁇ reting the data with respect to the (known) page structure
  • the prefe ⁇ ed embodiment of the netpage pen operates both as a normal marking ink pen and as a non- marking stylus
  • the marking aspect is not necessary for using the netpage system as a browsing system, such as when it is used as an Internet interface
  • Each netpage pen is registered with the netpage system and has a unique pen ID 61 - 16 -
  • Figure 23 shows the netpage pen class diagram, reflecting pen-related information maintained by a registration server 11 on the netpage network
  • the pen determines its position and o ⁇ entation relative to the page
  • the nib is attached to a force sensor, and the force on the nib is mte ⁇ reted relative to a threshold to indicate whether the pen is "up” or "down”
  • This allows a interactive element on the page to be 'clicked' by pressing with the pen mb, in order to request, say, information from a network
  • the force is captured as a continuous value to allow, say, the full dynamics of a signature to be ve ⁇ fied
  • the pen determines the position and o ⁇ entation of its nib on the netpage by imaging, in the infrared spectrum, an area 193 of the page in the vicinity of the nib It decodes the nearest tag and computes the position of the nib relative to the tag from the observed perspective distortion on the imaged tag and the known geometry of the pen optics
  • the position resolution of the tag may be low, because the tag density on the page is inversely proportional to the tag size, the adjusted position resolution is quite high, exceeding the minimum resolution required for accurate handw ⁇ ting recognition
  • Pen actions relative to a netpage are captured as a se ⁇ es of strokes
  • a stroke consists of a sequence of time- stamped pen positions on the page, initiated by a pen-down event and completed by the subsequent pen-up event
  • a stroke is also tagged with the page ID 50 of the netpage whenever the page ID changes, which, under normal circumstances, is at the commencement of the stroke
  • Each netpage pen has a cu ⁇ ent selection 826 associated with it, allowing the user to perform copy and paste operations etc
  • the selection is timestamped to allow the system to discard it after a defined time penod
  • the cu ⁇ ent selection desc ⁇ bes a region of a page instance It consists of the most recent digital ink stroke captured through the pen relative to the background area of the page It is inte ⁇ reted m an application-specific manner once it is submitted to an application via a selection hyperlink activation
  • Each pen has a cu ⁇ ent nib 824 This is the mb last notified by the pen to the system In the case of the default netpage pen desc ⁇ bed above, either the marking black ink nib or the non-marking stylus nib is cu ⁇ ent
  • Each pen also has a cu ⁇ ent nib style 825 This is the nib style last associated with the pen by an application, e g in response to the user selecting a color from a palette
  • the default nib style is the nib style associated with the cu ⁇ ent nib Strokes captured through a pen are tagged with the current mb style When the strokes are subsequently reproduced, they are reproduced in the nib style with which they are tagged
  • the pen Whenever the pen is within range of a p ⁇ nter with which it can communicate, the pen slowly flashes its "online" LED When the pen fails to decode a stroke relative to the page, it momentanly activates its "e ⁇ or” LED When the pen succeeds in decoding a stroke relative to the page, it momenta ⁇ ly activates its "ok” LED
  • a sequence of captured strokes is refe ⁇ ed to as digital ink
  • Digital ink forms the basis for the digital exchange of drawings and handw ⁇ ting, for online recognition of handw ⁇ ting, and for online ve ⁇ fication of signatures
  • the pen is wireless and transmits digital ink to the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link
  • the transmitted digital ink is encrypted for pnvacy and secu ⁇ ty and packetized for efficient transmission, but is always flushed on a pen-up event to ensure timely handling m the p ⁇ nter
  • the pen When the pen is out-of-range of a pnnter it buffers digital ink in internal memory, which has a capacity of over ten minutes of continuous handw ⁇ ting When the pen is once again with range of a p ⁇ nter, it transfers any buffered digital ink
  • a pen can be registered with any number of pnnters, but because all state data resides in netpages both on paper and on the network, it is largely lmmatenal which p ⁇ nter a pen is communicating with at any particular time
  • a prefe ⁇ ed embodiment of the pen is desc ⁇ bed in greater detail in Section 6 below, with reference to Figures 8 to 10 - 17 -
  • the netpage pnnter 601 receives data relating to a stroke from the pen 101 when the pen is used to interact with a netpage 1
  • the coded data 3 of the tags 4 is read by the pen when it is used to execute a movement, such as a stroke
  • the data allows the identity of the particular page and associated interactive element to be determined and an indication of the relative positioning of the pen relative to the page to be obtained
  • the indicating data is transmitted to the pnnter, where it resolves, via the DNS, the page ID 50 of the stroke into the network address of the netpage page server 10 which maintains the co ⁇ esponding page instance 830 It then transmits the stroke to the page server If the page was recently identified in an earlier stroke, then the p ⁇ nter may already have the address of the relevant page server in its cache
  • Each netpage consists of a compact page layout maintained persistently by a netpage page server (see below)
  • the page layout refers to objects such as images, fonts and pieces of text, typically stored elsewhere on the netpage
  • the page server When the page server receives the stroke from the pen, it ret ⁇ eves the page desc ⁇ ption to which the stroke applies, and determines which element of the page desc ⁇ ption the stroke intersects It is then able to inte ⁇ ret the stroke in the context of the type of the relevant element
  • a “click” is a stroke where the distance and time between the pen down position and the subsequent pen up position are both less than some small maximum
  • An object which is activated by a click typically requires a click to be activated, and accordingly, a longer stroke is ignored
  • the failure of a pen action, such as a "sloppy" click, to register is indicated by the lack of response from the pen's "ok" LED
  • a hyperlink is a means of sending a message to a remote application, and typically elicits a p ⁇ nted response in the netpage system
  • a hyperlink element 844 identifies the application 71 which handles activation of the hyperlink, a link ID 54 which identifies the hyperlink to the application, an "alias required" flag which asks the system to mclude the user's application alias ID 65 in the hyperlink activation, and a desc ⁇ ption which is used when the hyperlink is recorded as a favonte or appears in the user's history
  • the hyperlink element class diagram is shown in Figure 29
  • a general hyperlink can implement a request for a linked document, or may simply signal a preference to a server
  • a form hyperlink submits the conespondmg form to the application
  • a selection hyperlink submits the cu ⁇ ent selection to the application If the cu ⁇ ent selection contams a single-word piece of text, for example, the application may return a single-page document giving the word's meaning within the context in which it appears, or a translation into a different language
  • Each hyperlink type is characte ⁇ zed by what information is submitted to the application
  • the co ⁇ esponding hyperlink instance 862 records a transaction ID 55 which can be specific to the page instance on which the hyperlink instance appears
  • the transaction ID can identify user-specific data to the application, for example a "shopping
  • the system includes the pen's cu ⁇ ent selection 826 in a selection hyperlink activation
  • the system includes the content of the associated form instance 868 m a form hyperlink activation, although if the hyperlink has its "submit delta" att ⁇ bute set, only input since the last form submission is included
  • the system includes an effective return path all hyperlink activations
  • a hyperlmked group 866 is a group element 838 which has an associated hyperlink, as shown in Figure 31 When input occurs through any field element in the group, the hyperlink 844 associated with the group is activated
  • a hyperlmked group can be used to associate hyperlink behavior with a field such as a checkbox It can also be used, in - 18 - conjunction with the "submit delta" att ⁇ bute of a form hyperlink, to provide continuous input to an application It can therefore be used to support a "blackboard" interaction model, 1 e where input is captured and therefore shared as soon as it occurs
  • a form defines a collection of related input fields used to capture a related set of inputs through a p ⁇ nted netpage
  • a form allows a user to submit one or more parameters to an application software program running on a server
  • a form 867 is a group element 838 in the document hierarchy It ultimately contains a set of terminal field elements 839
  • a form instance 868 represents a pnnted instance of a form It consists of a set of field instances 870 which co ⁇ espond to the field elements 845 of the form
  • Each field instance has an associated value 871, whose type depends on the type of the co ⁇ esponding field element
  • Each field value records input through a particular p ⁇ nted form instance, l e through one or more pnnted netpages
  • the form class diagram is shown in Figure 32
  • Each form instance has a status 872 which indicates whether the form is active, frozen, submitted, void or expired A form is active when first pnnted A form becomes frozen once it is signed A form becomes submitted once one of its submission hyperlinks has been activated, unless the hyperlink has its "submit delta" att ⁇ bute set A form becomes void when the user invokes a void form, reset form or duplicate form page command A form expires when the time the form has been active exceeds the form's specified lifetime While the form is active, form input is allowed Input through a form which is not active is instead captured in the background field 833 of the relevant page instance When the form is active or frozen, form submission is allowed Any attempt to submit a form when the form is not active or frozen is rejected, and instead elicits an form status report Each form instance is associated (at 59) with any form instances denved from it, thus providing a version history This allows all but the latest version of a form in a particular time penod to be excluded from a search
  • Digital ink 873 consists of a set of timestamped stroke groups 874, each of which consists of a set of styled strokes 875 Each stroke consists of a set of timestamped pen positions 876, each of which also includes pen o ⁇ entation and nib force
  • a field element 845 can be a checkbox field 877, a text field 878, a drawing field 879, or a signature field
  • a checkbox field has an associated boolean value 881, as shown in Figure 35 Any mark (a tick, a cross, a stroke, a fill zigzag, etc ) captured in a checkbox field's zone causes a true value to be assigned to the field's value
  • a text field has an associated text value 882, as shown in Figure 36 Any digital ink captured in a text field's zone is automatically converted to text via online handw ⁇ ting recognition, and the text is assigned to the field's value Online handwnting recognition is well-understood see, for example, Tappert, C , C Y Suen and T Wakahara, "The State of the Art in On-Line Handw ⁇ ting Recognition", IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol 12, No 8, August 1990, the contents of which are herein inco ⁇ orated by cross-reference)
  • a signature field has an associated digital signature value 883, as shown Figure 37 Any digital ink captured in a signature field's zone is automatically venfied with respect to
  • a field element is hidden if its "hidden" att ⁇ bute is set
  • a hidden field element does not have an input zone on a page and does not accept input It can have an associated field value which is included in the form data when the form containing the field is submitted - 19 -
  • Editing commands such as stnke-throughs indicating deletion, can also be recognized in form fields
  • Digital ink as already stated, consists of a sequence of strokes Any stroke which starts in a particular element's zone is appended to that element's digital ink stream, ready for inte ⁇ retation Any stroke not appended to an object's digital ink stream is appended to the background field's digital ink stream
  • the raw digital ink captured m every field is retained on the netpage page server and is optionally transmitted with the form data when the form is submitted to the application.
  • the entire background area of a form can be designated as a drawing field
  • the application can then decide, on the basis of the presence of digital ink outside the explicit fields of the form, to route the form to a human operator, on the assumption that the user may have indicated amendments to the filled-m fields outside of those fields
  • Figure 38 shows a flowchart of the process of handling pen input relative to a netpage
  • the process consists of receiving (at 884) a stroke from the pen, identifying (at 885) the page instance 830 to which the page ID 50 in the stroke refers, ret ⁇ eving (at 886) the page desc ⁇ ption 5, identifying (at 887) a formatted element 839 whose zone 58 the stroke intersects, determining (at 888) whether the formatted element co ⁇ esponds to a field element, and if so appending (at 892) the received stroke to the digital mk of the field value 871, inte ⁇ reting (at 893) the accumulated digital ink of the field, and determining (at 894) whether the field is part of a hyperlmked group 866 and if so activating (at 895) the associated hyperlink, alternatively determining (at 889) whether the formatted element co ⁇ esponds to a hyperlink element and if so activating (at 895) the
  • Figure 38a shows a detailed flowchart of step 893 in the process shown in Figure 38, where the accumulated digital ink of a field is inte ⁇ reted according to the type of the field
  • the process consists of determining (at 896) whether the field is a checkbox and (at 897) whether the digital ink represents a checkmark, and if so assigning (at 898) a true value to the field value, alternatively determining (at 899) whether the field is a text field and if so converting (at 900) the digital ink to computer text, with the help of the approp ⁇ ate registration server, and assigning (at 901) the converted computer text to the field value, alternatively determining (at 902) whether the field is a signature field and if so venfymg (at 903) the digital ink as the signature of the pen's owner, with the help of the approp ⁇ ate registration server, creating (at 904) a digital signature of the contents of the co ⁇ esponding form, also with the help of
  • a page server command is a command which is handled locally by the page server It operates directly on form, page and document instances
  • a page server command 907 can be a void form command 908, a duplicate form command 909, a reset form command 910, a get form status command 911, a duplicate page command 912, a reset page command 913, a get page status command 914, a duplicate document command 915, a reset document command 916, or a get document status command 917, as shown m Figure 39
  • a void form command voids the co ⁇ esponding form instance
  • a duplicate form command voids the co ⁇ esponding form instance and then produces an active pnnted copy of the cu ⁇ ent form instance with field values preserved The copy contains the same hyperlink transaction IDs as the ongmal, and so is indistinguishable from the onginal to an application
  • a reset form command voids the conespondmg form instance and then produces an active p ⁇ nted copy of the form instance with field values discarded
  • a get form status command produces a p ⁇ nted report on the status of the conespondmg form instance, including
  • a duplicate page command produces a pnnted copy of the conespondmg page instance with the background field value preserved If the page contains a form or is part of a form, then the duplicate page command is inte ⁇ reted as a duplicate form command
  • a reset page command produces a p ⁇ nted copy of the co ⁇ esponding page instance with the background field value discarded If the page contains a form or is part of a form, then the reset page command is inte ⁇ reted as a reset form command
  • a get page status command produces a p ⁇ nted report on the status of the co ⁇ esponding page instance, including who published it, when it was p ⁇ nted, for whom it was p ⁇ nted, and the status of any forms it contams or is part of
  • the netpage logo which appears on every netpage is usually associated with a duplicate page element
  • field values are pnnted in their native form
  • l e a checkmark appears as a standard checkmark graphic
  • text appears as typeset text Only drawings and signatures appear in their onginal form, with a signature accompanied by a standard graphic indicating successful signature venfication
  • a duplicate document command produces a pnnted copy of the conespondmg document instance with background field values preserved If the document contains any forms, then the duplicate document command duplicates the forms in the same way a duplicate form command does A reset document command produces a p ⁇ nted copy of the co ⁇ esponding document instance with background field values discarded If the document contains any forms, then the - 21 - reset document command resets the forms in the same way a reset form command does A get document status command produces a pnnted report on the status of the conespondmg document instance, including who published it, when it was p ⁇ nted, for whom it was p ⁇ nted, and the status of any forms it contains
  • the command operates on the page identified by the pen's cunent selection rather than on the page containing the command This allows a menu of page server commands to be pnnted If the target page doesn't contain a page server command element for the designated page server command, then the command is ignored
  • An application can provide application-specific handling by embedding the relevant page server command element in a hyperlmked group
  • the page server activates the hyperlink associated with the hyperlmked group rather than executing the page server command
  • a page server command element is hidden if its "hidden" att ⁇ bute is set
  • a hidden command element does not have an input zone on a page and so cannot be activated directly by a user It can, however, be activated via a page server command embedded in a different page, if that page server command has its "on selected" att ⁇ bute set
  • each netpage is p ⁇ nted with the netpage logo at the bottom to indicate that it is a ne ⁇ age and therefore has interactive properties
  • the logo also acts as a copy button In most cases pressing the logo produces a copy of the page In the case of a form, the button produces a copy of the entire form And in the case of a secure document, such as a ticket or coupon, the button elicits an explanatory note or advertising page
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter has a single button labelled "Help" When pressed it elicits a single page of information, including status of p ⁇ nter connection • status of p ⁇ nter consumables top-level help menu document function menu top-level netpage network directory
  • the help menu provides a hierarchical manual on how to use the netpage system
  • the document function menu includes the following functions
  • a document function is initiated by simply pressing the button and then touching any page of the document
  • the status of a document indicates who published it and when, to whom it was delivered, and to whom and when it was subsequently submitted as a form
  • the netpage network directory allows the user to navigate the hierarchy of publications and services on the network As an alternative, the user can call the netpage network "900" number "yellow pages” and speak to a human operator The operator can locate the desired document and route it to the user's p ⁇ nter Depending on the document type, the publisher or the user pays the small "yellow pages" service fee
  • the help page is obviously unavailable if the p ⁇ nter is unable to p ⁇ nt In this case the "e ⁇ or" light is lit and the user can request remote diagnosis over the network - 22 -
  • news is used as a canonical publication example to illustrate personalization mechanisms in the netpage system
  • news is often used in the limited sense of newspaper and newsmagazine news
  • the intended scope in the present context is wider
  • the editonal content and the advertising content of a news publication are personalized using different mechamsms
  • the editonal content is personalized according to the reader's explicitly stated and implicitly captured interest profile
  • the advertising content is personalized according to the reader's locality and demographic 2.1 EDITORIAL PERSONALIZATION
  • a subscnber can draw on two kinds of news sources those that deliver news publications, and those that deliver news streams While news publications are aggregated and edited by the publisher, news streams are aggregated either by a news publisher or by a specialized news aggregator News publications typically conespond to traditional newspapers and newsmagazines, while news streams can be many and va ⁇ ed a "raw" news feed from a news service, a cartoon strip, a freelance wnter' s column, a friend's bulletin board, or the reader's own e-mail
  • the netpage publication server supports the publication of edited news publications as well as the aggregation of multiple news streams By handling the aggregation and hence the formatting of news streams selected directly by the reader, the server is able to place advertising on pages over which it otherwise has no editonal control
  • the subscnber builds a daily newspaper by selecting one or more cont ⁇ buting news publications, and creating a personalized version of each
  • the resulting daily editions are p ⁇ nted and bound together into a single newspaper
  • the vanous members of a household typically express their different interests and tastes by selecting different daily publications and then customizing them
  • the reader optionally selects specific sections Some sections appear daily, while others appear weekly
  • the daily sections available from The New York Times online for example, include “Page One Plus”, “National”, “International”, “Opinion”, “Business”, “Arts/Living”, “Technology”, and “Sports”
  • the set of available sections is specific to a publication, as is the default subset
  • the reader can extend the daily newspaper by creating custom sections, each one drawing on any number of news streams Custom sections might be created for e-mail and friends' announcements ("Personal"), or for momto ⁇ ng news feeds for specific topics ("Alerts" or "Clippings)
  • the reader optionally specifies its size, either qualitatively (e g short, medium, or long), or nume ⁇ cally (I e as a limit on its number of pages), and the desired proportion of advertising, either qualitatively (e g high, normal, low, none), or nume ⁇ cally (I e as a percentage)
  • the reader also optionally expresses a preference for a large number of shorter articles or a small number of longer articles Each article is ideally w ⁇ tten (or edited) in both short and long forms to support this preference
  • An article may also be wntten (or edited) in different versions to match the expected sophistication of the reader, for example to provide children's and adults' versions
  • the approp ⁇ ate version is selected according to the reader's age
  • the reader can specify a "reading age" which takes precedence over their biological age
  • each section is selected and p ⁇ ontized by the editors, and each is assigned a useful lifetime By default they are delivered to all relevant subsc ⁇ bers, in p ⁇ onty order, subject to space constraints m the subsc ⁇ bers' editions
  • the reader may optionally enable collaborative filtenng This is then applied to articles which have a sufficiently long lifetime
  • Each article which qualifies for collaborative filtenng is p ⁇ nted with rating buttons at the end of the article
  • the buttons can provide an easy choice (e g "liked” and “disliked'), making it more likely that readers will bother to rate the article
  • the reader optionally specifies a serendipity factor, either qualitatively (e g do or don't smpnse me), or nume ⁇ cally
  • a high serendipity factor lowers the threshold used for matching du ⁇ ng collaborative filtenng
  • a high factor makes it more likely that the co ⁇ esponding section will be filled to the reader's specified capacity
  • a different serendipity factor can be specified for different days of the week
  • the reader also optionally specifies topics of particular interest withm a section, and this modifies the pnonties assigned by the editors
  • the speed of the reader's Internet connection affects the quality at which images can be delivered
  • the reader optionally specifies a preference for fewer images or smaller images or both If the number or size of images is not reduced, then images may be delivered at lower quality (I e at lower resolution or with greater compression)
  • the reader specifies how quantities, dates, times and monetary values are localized This involves specifying whether units are impe ⁇ al or metnc, a local timezone and time format, and a local cu ⁇ ency, and whether the localization consist of in situ translation or annotation
  • the reader optionally specifies a global preference for a larger presentation Both text and images are scaled accordingly, and less information is accommodated on each page
  • the language in which a news publication is published, and its conespondmg text encoding, is a property of the publication and not a preference expressed by the user
  • the netpage system can be configured to provide automatic translation services in vanous guises 2.2 ADVERTISING LOCALIZATION AND TARGETING
  • the personalization of the editonal content directly affects the advertising content, because advertising is typically placed to exploit the editonal context Travel ads, for example, are more likely to appear in a travel section than elsewhere
  • the value of the editonal content to an advertiser (and therefore to the publisher) lies m its ability to attract large numbers of readers with the ⁇ ght demographics
  • Effective advertising is placed on the basis of locality and demographics
  • Locality determines proximity to particular services, retailers etc , and particular interests and concerns associated with the local community and environment Demographics determine general interests and preoccupations as well as likely spending patterns
  • a news publisher's most profitable product is advertising "space", a multi-dimensional entity determined by the publication's geographic coverage, the size of its readership, its readership demographics, and the page area available for advertising
  • the netpage publication server computes the approximate multi-dimensional size of a publication's saleable advertising space on a per-section basis, taking into account the publication's geographic coverage, the section's readership, the size of each reader's section edition, each reader's advertising proportion, and each reader's demographic
  • the netpage system allows the advertising space to be defined in greater detail, and allows smaller pieces of it to be sold separately It therefore allows it to be sold at closer to its true value
  • the same advertising "slot" can be sold varying proportions to several advertisers, with individual readers' pages randomly receiving the advertisement of one advertiser or another, overall preserving the proportion of space sold to each advertiser
  • the netpage system allows advertising to be linked directly to detailed product information and online purchasing It therefore raises the int ⁇ nsic value of the advertising space
  • an advertising aggregator can provide arbitra ⁇ ly broad coverage of both geography and demographics
  • the subsequent disaggregation is efficient because it is automatic This makes it more cost-effective for publishers to deal with advertising aggregators than to directly capture advertising Even though the advertising aggregator is taking a proportion of - 24 - advertismg revenue, publishers may find the change profit-neutral because of the greater efficiency of aggregation
  • the advertising aggregator acts as an intermediary between advertisers and publishers, and may place the same advertisement m multiple publications
  • ad placement m a netpage publication can be more complex than ad placement in the publication's traditional counte ⁇ art, because the publication's advertising space is more complex While igno ⁇ ng the full complexities of negotiations between advertisers, advertising aggregators and publishers, the prefe ⁇ ed form of the netpage system provides some automated support for these negotiations, including support for automated auctions of advertising space Automation is particularly desirable for the placement of advertisements which generate small amounts of income, such as small or highly localized advertisements
  • the aggregator captures and edits the advertisement and records it on a netpage ad server Co ⁇ espondingly, the publisher records the ad placement on the relevant netpage publication server When the netpage publication server lays out each user's personalized publication, it picks the relevant advertisements from the netpage ad server 2.3 USER PROFILES 2.3.1 Information Filtering
  • the customization of a publication is typically publication-specific, and so the customization information is maintained by the relevant netpage publication server
  • a collaborative filtenng vector consists of the user's ratings of a number of news items It is used to co ⁇ elate different users' interests for the pu ⁇ oses of making recommendations
  • Presentation preferences including those for quantities, dates and times, are likewise global and maintained in the same way
  • the localization of advertising relies on the locality indicated in the user's contact details, while the targeting of advertising relies on personal information such as date of birth, gender, mantal status, income, profession, education, or qualitative de ⁇ vatives such as age range and income range
  • advertismg pu ⁇ oses For those users who choose to reveal personal information for advertismg pu ⁇ oses, the information is maintained by the relevant netpage registration server In the absence of such information, advertismg can be targeted on the basis of the demographic associated with the user's ZIP or ZIP+4 Code
  • Each user, pen, pnnter, application provider and application is assigned its own unique identifier, and the netpage registration server maintains the relationships between them as shown in Figures 21, 22, 23 and 24
  • a publisher is a special kind of application provider
  • a publication is a special kind of application - 25 -
  • Each user 800 may be authonzed to use any number of pnnters 802, and each pnnter may allow any number of users to use it
  • Each user has a single default p ⁇ nter (at 66), to which pe ⁇ odical publications are delivered by default, whilst pages p ⁇ nted on demand are delivered to the p ⁇ nter through which the user is interacting
  • the server keeps track of which publishers a user has autho ⁇ zed to p ⁇ nt to the user's default p ⁇ nter
  • a publisher does not record the ID of any particular p ⁇ nter, but instead resolves the ID when it is required
  • the publisher 806 (l e application provider 803) is authonzed to p ⁇ nt to a specified pnnter or the user's default pnnter This authonzation can be revoked at any time by the user
  • Each user may have several pens 801, but a pen is specific to a single user If a user is authonzed to use a particular p ⁇ nter, then that p ⁇ nter recognizes any of the user's pens
  • the pen ID is used to locate the conespondmg user profile maintained by a particular netpage registration server, via the DNS in the usual way
  • a Web terminal 809 can be authonzed to pnnt on a particular netpage p ⁇ nter, allowing Web pages and netpage documents encountered du ⁇ ng Web browsing to be conveniently pnnted on the nearest netpage p ⁇ nter
  • the netpage system can collect, on behalf of a p ⁇ nter provider, fees and commissions on income earned through publications p ⁇ nted on the provider's pnnters Such income can include advertising fees, click-through fees, e- commerce commissions, and transaction fees If the p ⁇ nter is owned by the user, then the user is the p ⁇ nter provider
  • Each user also has a netpage account 820 which is used to accumulate micro-debits and credits (such as those desc ⁇ bed in the preceding paragraph), contact details 815, including name, address and telephone numbers, global preferences 816, including pnvacy, delivery and localization settings, any number of biometnc records 817, containing the user's encoded signature 818, finge ⁇ nt 819 etc, a handw ⁇ ting model 819 automatically maintained by the system, and SET payment card accounts 821 with which e-commerce payments can be made
  • a netpage user can maintain a list 922 of "favo ⁇ tes" - links to useful documents etc on the netpage network
  • the list is maintained by the system on the user's behalf It is organized as a hierarchy of folders 924, a prefer ⁇ ed embodiment of which is shown in the class diagram in Figure 41
  • the system maintains a history list 929 on each user's behalf, containing links to documents etc accessed by the user through the netpage system It is organized as a date-ordered list, a prefened embodiment of which is shown in the class diagram in Figure 42 2.4 INTELLIGENT PAGE LAYOUT
  • the netpage publication server automatically lays out the pages of each user's personalized publication on a section-by-section basis Since most advertisements are in the form of pre-formatted rectangles, they are placed on the page before the editonal content
  • the advertising ratio for a section can be achieved with wildly varying advertising ratios on individual pages within the section, and the ad layout algo ⁇ thm exploits this
  • the algo ⁇ thm is configured to attempt to co-locate closely tied editonal and advertising content, such as placing ads for roofing matenal specifically within the publication because of a special feature on do-it-yourself roofing repairs
  • the editonal content selected for the user including text and associated images and graphics, is then laid out according to vanous aesthetic rules
  • the entire process, including the selection of ads and the selection of editonal content, must be iterated once the layout has converged, to attempt to more closely achieve the user's stated section size preference
  • the section size preference can, however, be matched on average over time, allowing significant day-to-day va ⁇ ations 2.5 DOCUMENT FORMAT
  • the pnmary efficiency mechanism is the separation of information specific to a single user's edition and information shared between multiple users' editions
  • the specific information consists of the page layout
  • the shared information consists of the objects to which the page layout refers, including images, graphics, and pieces of text
  • a text object contains fully-formatted text represented in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) using the Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) XSL provides precise control over text formatting independendy of the region into which the text is being set, which m this case is being provided by the layout
  • the text object contains embedded language codes to enable automatic translation, and embedded hyphenation hints to aid with paragraph formatting
  • An image object encodes an image in the JPEG 2000 wavelet-based compressed image format
  • a graphic object encodes a 2D graphic in Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) format
  • the layout itself consists of a se ⁇ es of placed image and graphic objects, linked textflow objects through which text objects flow, hyperlinks and input fields as desc ⁇ bed above, and watermark regions These layout objects are summa ⁇ zed Table 3
  • the layout uses a compact format suitable for efficient distnbution and storage
  • the netpage publication server allocates, with the help of the netpage ID server 12, a unique ID for each page, page instance, document, and document instance
  • the server computes a set of optimized subsets of the shared content and creates a multicast channel for each subset, and then tags each user-specific layout with the names of the multicast channels which will cany the shared content used by that layout
  • the server then pointcasts each user's layouts to that user's p ⁇ nter via the approp ⁇ ate page server, and when the pointcastmg is complete, multicasts the shared content on the specified channels
  • each page server and p ⁇ nter subscnbes to the multicast channels specified in the page layouts Du ⁇ ng the multicasts, each page server and p ⁇ nter extracts from the multicast streams those objects refened to by its page layouts - 27 -
  • the page servers persistently archive the received page layouts and shared content
  • the p ⁇ nter re-creates the fully- populated layout and then rastenzes and pnnts it
  • the p ⁇ nter p ⁇ nts pages faster than they can be delivered Assuming a quarter of each page is covered with images, the average page has a size of less than 400KB The pnnter can therefore hold in excess of 100 such pages in its internal 64MB memory, allowing for temporary buffers etc
  • the pnnter p ⁇ nts at a rate of one page per second This is equivalent to 400KB or about 3Mbit of page data per second, which is similar to the highest expected rate of page data delivery over a broadband network
  • the netpage publication server therefore allows pnnters to submit requests for re-multicasts When a c ⁇ tical number of requests is received or a timeout occurs, the server re-multicasts the co ⁇ esponding shared objects
  • a p ⁇ nter can produce an exact duplicate at any time by ret ⁇ eving its page layouts and contents from the relevant page server 2.7 ON-DEMAND DOCUMENTS
  • a netpage formatting server is a special instance of a netpage publication server
  • the netpage formatting server has knowledge of vanous Internet document formats, including Adobe's Portable Document Format (PDF), and Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) In the case of HTML, it can make use of the higher resolution of the p ⁇ nted page to present Web pages in a multi-column format, with a table of contents It can automatically include all Web pages directly linked to the requested page The user can tune this behavior via a preference
  • the netpage formatting server makes standard netpage behavior, including interactivity and persistence, available on any Internet document, no matter what its ongin and format It hides knowledge of different document formats from both the netpage p ⁇ nter and the netpage page server, and hides knowledge of the netpage system from Web servers
  • Cryptography is used to protect sensitive information, both in storage and m transit, and to authenticate parties to a transaction
  • the netpage network uses both classes of cryptography
  • Secret-key cryptography also refe ⁇ ed to as symmet ⁇ c cryptography, uses the same key to encrypt and decrypt a message Two parties wishing to exchange messages must first a ⁇ ange to securely exchange the secret key
  • Public-key cryptography also refe ⁇ ed to as asymmetnc cryptography, uses two encryption keys The two keys are mathematically related in such a way that any message encrypted using one key can only be decrypted usmg the other key One of these keys is then published, while the other is kept pnvate
  • the public key is used to encrypt any message intended for the holder of the pnvate key Once encrypted using the public key, a message can only be decrypted using the pnvate key
  • two parties can securely exchange messages without first having to exchange a secret key
  • Pubhc-key cryptography can be used to create a digital signature
  • the holder of the pnvate key can create a known hash of a message and then encrypt the hash using the pnvate key
  • anyone can then ve ⁇ fy that the encrypted hash constitutes the "signature" of the holder of the pnvate key with respect to that particular message by decrypting the encrypted hash using the public key and venfying the hash agamst the message
  • the signature is appended to the message, then the recipient of the message can ve ⁇ fy both that the message is genuine and that it has not been altered in transit
  • a certificate authonty is a trusted third party which authenticates the connection between a public key and someone's identity
  • the certificate authonty venfies the person's identity by examining identity documents, and then creates and signs a digital certificate containing the person's identity details and public key
  • convinced who trusts the certificate authonty can use the public key in the certificate with a high degree of certainty that it is genuine They just have to venfy that the certificate has indeed been signed by the certificate authonty, whose public key is well-known
  • Each netpage pnnter is assigned a pair of unique identifiers at time of manufacture which are stored in readonly memory the pnnter and in the netpage registration server database
  • the first ID 62 is public and umquely identifies the p ⁇ nter on the netpage network
  • the second ID is secret and is used when the p ⁇ nter is first registered on the network
  • the server compares the secret ID agamst the p ⁇ nter' s secret ID recorded in its database, and accepts the registration if the IDs match It then creates and signs a certificate containing the p ⁇ nter' s public ID and public signature key, and stores the certificate m the registration database
  • the netpage registration server acts as a certificate authonty for netpage pnnters, since it has access to secret information allowing it to ven
  • a record is created in the netpage registration server database authonzing the publisher to pnnt the publication to the user's default p ⁇ nter or a specified p ⁇ nter
  • Every document sent to a pnnter via a page server is addressed to a particular user and is signed by the publisher using the publisher's pnvate signature key
  • the page server venfies, via the registration database, that the publisher is autho ⁇ zed to deliver the publication to the specified user
  • the page server venfies the signature using the publisher's public key, obtained from the publisher's certificate stored in the registration database
  • the netpage registration server accepts requests to add pnnting autho ⁇ zations to the database, so long as those requests are initiated via a pen registered to the p ⁇ nter 3.3 NETPAGE PEN SECURITY
  • Each netpage pen is assigned a unique identifier at time of manufacture which is stored in read-only memory in the pen and m the netpage registration server database
  • the pen ID 61 uniquely identifies the pen on the netpage network
  • a netpage pen can "know” a number of netpage pnnters, and a p ⁇ nter can "know” a number of pens
  • a pen - 29 - commumcates with a pnnter via a radio frequency signal whenever it is withm range of the p ⁇ nter Once a pen and p ⁇ nter are registered, they regularly exchange session keys Whenever the pen transmits digital ink to the pnnter, the digital ink is always encrypted using the appropnate session key Digital ink is never transmitted m the clear
  • a pen stores a session key for every pnnter it knows, indexed by p ⁇ nter ID, and a pnnter stores a session key for every pen it knows, indexed by pen ID Both have a large but finite storage capacity for session keys, and will forget a session key on a least-recently-used basis if necessary
  • the pen and pnnter discover whether they know each other If they don't know each other, then the p ⁇ nter determines whether it is supposed to know the pen This might be, for example, because the pen belongs to a user who is registered to use the p ⁇ nter If the pnnter is meant to know the pen but doesn't, then it initiates the automatic pen registration procedure If the p ⁇ nter isn't meant to know the pen, then it agrees with the pen to ignore it until the pen is placed in a charging cup, at which time it initiates the registration procedure
  • the pen In addition to its public ID, the pen contains a secret key-exchange key
  • the key-exchange key is also recorded in the netpage registration server database at time of manufacture Dunng registration, the pen transmits its pen ID to the p ⁇ nter, and the p ⁇ nter transmits the pen ID to the netpage registration server
  • the server generates a session key for the p ⁇ nter and pen to use, and securely tiansmits the session key to the pnnter It also transmits a copy of the session key encrypted with the pen's key-exchange key
  • the p ⁇ nter stores the session key internally, indexed by the pen ID, and transmits the encrypted session key to the pen
  • the pen stores the session key internally, indexed by the pnnter ID
  • the pen uses secret-key rather than public-key encryption because of hardware performance constraints in the pen 3.4 SECURE DOCUMENTS
  • the netpage system supports the delivery of secure documents such as tickets and coupons
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter includes a facility to p ⁇ nt watermarks, but will only do so on request from publishers who are suitably authonzed
  • the publisher indicates its authonty to p ⁇ nt watermarks in its certificate, which the pnnter is able to authenticate
  • the "watermark" p ⁇ nting process uses an alternative dither mat ⁇ x in specified "watermark" regions of the page Back-to-back pages contain minor-image watermark regions which coincide when pnnted
  • the dither matrices used m odd and even pages' watermark regions are designed to produce an interference effect when the regions are viewed together, achieved by looking through the p ⁇ nted sheet
  • Secure documents are typically generated as part of e-commerce transactions They can therefore include the user's photograph which was captured when the user registered biometnc information with the netpage registration server, as descnbed in Section 2
  • the recipient When presented with a secure netpage document, the recipient can ve ⁇ fy its authenticity by requesting its status in the usual way
  • the unique ID of a secure document is only valid for the lifetime of the document, and secure document IDs are allocated non-contiguously to prevent their prediction by opportunistic forgers
  • a secure document venfication pen can be developed with built-in feedback on venfication failure, to support easy point-of-presentation document venfication - 30 -
  • the netpage system uses the Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) system as one of its payment systems SET, having been developed by MasterCard and Visa, is organized around payment cards, and this is reflected in the terminology However, much of the system is independent of the type of accounts being used
  • SET Secure Electronic Transaction
  • the netpage registration server acts as a proxy for the netpage user (I e the cardholder) in SET payment transactions
  • the netpage system uses biomet ⁇ cs to authenticate the user and autho ⁇ ze SET payments Because the system is j>en-based, the biometnc used is the user's on-line signature, consisting of time-varying pen position and pressure A finge ⁇ nt biometnc can also be used by designing a finge ⁇ nnt sensor into the pen, although at a higher cost The type of biometnc used only affects the capture of the biometnc, not the authonzation aspects of the system
  • the first step to bemg able to make SET payments is to register the user's biometnc with the netpage registration server This is done in a controlled environment, for example a bank, where the biometnc can be captured at the same time as the user's identity is ve ⁇ fied The biometnc is captured and stored in the registration database, linked to the user's record The user's photograph is also optionally captured and linked to the record The SET cardholder registration process is completed, and the resulting pnv
  • the p ⁇ nter securely transmits the order information, the pen ID and the biometnc data to the netpage registration server
  • the server venfies the biometnc with respect to the user identified by the pen ID, and from then on acts as the user's proxy in completing the SET payment transaction
  • the netpage system includes a mechanism for micro-payments, to allow the user to be conveniently charged for p ⁇ nting low-cost documents on demand and for copying copynght documents, and possibly also to allow the user to be reimbursed for expenses mcu ⁇ ed in p ⁇ nting advertising matenal The latter depends on the level of subsidy already - 31 - provided to the user
  • a network account which aggregates micro-payments
  • the user receives a statement on a regular basis, and can settle any outstanding debit balance using the standard payment mechanism
  • the network account can be extended to aggregate subscnption fees for penodicals, which would also otherwise be presented to the user m the form of individual statements 4.4 TRANSACTIONS
  • the application When a user requests a netpage in a particular application context, the application is able to embed a user-specific transaction ID 55 in the page Subsequent input through the page is tagged with the transaction ID, and the application is thereby able to establish an approp ⁇ ate context for the user's input
  • the netpage registration server instead maintains an anonymous relationship between a user and an application via a unique alias ID 65, as shown in Figure 24 Whenever the user activates a hyperlink tagged with the "registered" att ⁇ bute, the netpage page server asks the netpage registration server to translate the associated application ID 64, together with the pen ID 61, into an alias ID 65 The alias ID is then submitted to the hyperlink's application The application maintains state information indexed by alias ID, and is able to retrieve user-specific state information without knowledge of the global identity of the user
  • the system also maintains an independent certificate and pnvate signature key for each of a user's applications, to allow it to sign application transactions on behalf of the user using only application-specific information
  • UPC product bar code
  • Each application is associated with an application provider, and the system maintains an account on behalf of each application provider, to allow it to credit and debit the provider for click-through fees etc
  • An application provider can be a publisher of penodical subscnbed content
  • the system records the user's willingness to receive the subscnbed publication, as well as the expected frequency of publication 4.5 RESOURCE DESCRIPTIONS AND COPYRIGHT
  • Each document and content object may be descnbed by one or more resource desc ⁇ ptions 842
  • Resource desc ⁇ ptions use the Dublin Core metadata element set, which is designed to facilitate discovery of electronic resources Dublin Core metadata conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) Resource Descnption Framework (RDF)
  • W3C World Wide Web Consortium
  • RDF Resource Descnption Framework
  • a resource desc ⁇ ption may identify nghts holders 920
  • the netpage system automatically transfers copynght fees from users to nghts holders when users pnnt copy ⁇ ght content 5 COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS
  • a communications protocol defines an ordered exchange of messages between entities
  • entities such as pens, pnnters and servers utilise a set of defined protocols to cooperatively handle user interaction with the netpage system
  • Each protocol is illustrated by way of a sequence diagram in which the honzontal dimension is used to represent message flow and the vertical dimension is used to represent time
  • Each entity is represented by a rectangle containing the name of the entity and a vertical column representing the lifeline of the entity Dunng the time an entity exists, the lifeline is shown as a dashed line Du ⁇ ng the time an entity is active, the lifeline is shown as a double line - 32 -
  • FIG. 43 A prefened embodiment of a subscnption delivery protocol is shown in Figure 43 A large number of users may subscnbe to a pe ⁇ odical publication Each user's edition may be laid out differentiy, but many users' editions will share common content such as text objects and image objects The subscnption delivery protocol therefore delivers document structures to individual pnnters via pomtcast, but delivers shared content objects via multicast
  • the application (l e publisher) first obtains a document ID 51 for each document from an ID server 12 It then sends each document structure, including its document ID and page desc ⁇ ptions, to the page server 10 responsible for the document's newly allocated ID It includes its own application ID 64, the subscnber's alias ID 65, and the relevant set of multicast channel names It signs the message using its pnvate signature key
  • the page server uses the application ID and alias ID to obtain from the registration server the conespondmg user ID 60, the user's selected pnnter ID 62 (which may be explicitly selected for the application, or may be the user's default p ⁇ nter), and the application's certificate
  • the application's certificate allows the page server to ve ⁇ fy the message signature
  • the page server's request to the registration server fails if the application ID and alias ID don't together identify a subscnption 808
  • the page server then allocates document and page instance IDs and forwards the page desc ⁇ ptions, including page IDs 50, to the p ⁇ nter It includes the relevant set of multicast channel names for the p ⁇ nter to listen to It then returns the newly allocated page IDs to the application for future reference
  • the application Once the application has dist ⁇ aded all of the document structures to the subsc ⁇ bers' selected pnnters via the relevant page servers, it multicasts the vanous subsets of the shared objects on the previously selected multicast channels
  • the pen When a user clicks on a netpage with a netpage pen, the pen communicates the click to the nearest netpage p ⁇ nter 601 The click identifies the page and a location on the page The pnnter already knows the ID 61 of the pen from the pen connection protocol
  • the pnnter determines, via the DNS, the network address of the page server 10a handling the particular page ID 50 The address may already be in its cache if the user has recently interacted with the same page The pnnter then forwards the pen ID, its own pnnter ID 62, the page ID and click location to the page server
  • the page server loads the page descnption 5 identified by the page ID and determines which input element's zone 58, if any, the click lies in Assuming the relevant input element is a hyperlink element 844, the page server then obtains the associated application ID 64 and link ID 54, and determines, via the DNS, the network address of the application server hosting the application 71
  • the page server uses the pen ID 61 to obtain the conespondmg user ID 60 from the registration server 11, and then allocates a globally unique hyperlink request ID 52 and builds a hyperlink request 934
  • the hyperlink request class diagram is shown in Figure 44
  • the hyperlink request records the IDs of the requesting user and p ⁇ nter, and identifies the clicked hyperlink instance 862
  • the page server then sends its own server ID 53, the hyperlink request ID, and the link ID to the application
  • the application produces a response document according to application-specific logic, and obtains a document ID 51 from an ID server 12 It then sends the document to the page server 10b responsible for the document's - 33 - newly allocated ID, together with the requesting page server's ID and the hyperlink request ID
  • the second page server sends the hyperlink request ID and application ID to the first page server to obtain the conespondmg user ID and pnnter ID 62
  • the first page server rejects the request if the hyperlink request has expired or is for a different application
  • the second page server allocates document instance and page IDs 50, returns the newly allocated page IDs to the application, adds the complete document to its own database, and finally sends the page descnptions to the requesting pnnter.
  • the hyperlink instance may include a meaningful transaction ID 55, in which case the first page server includes the transaction ID in the message sent to the application This allows the application to establish a transaction- specific context for the hyperlink activation
  • the first page server sends both the pen ID 61 and the hyperlink's application ID 64 to the registration server 11 to obtain not just the user ID conespond g to the pen ID but also the alias ID 65 co ⁇ esponding to the application ID and the user ID It includes the alias ID in the message sent to the application, allowing the application to establish a user-specific context for the hyperlink activation
  • the pen When a user draws a stroke on a netpage with a netpage pen, the pen communicates the stroke to the nearest netpage p ⁇ nter The stroke identifies the page and a path on the page
  • the p ⁇ nter forwards the pen ID 61, its own p ⁇ nter ID 62, the page ID 50 and stroke path to the page server 10 in the usual way
  • the page server loads the page desc ⁇ ption 5 identified by the page ID and determines which input element's zone 58, if any, the stroke intersects Assuming the relevant input element is a text field 878, the page server appends the stroke to the text field's digital ink
  • the page server After a penod of inactivity in the zone of the text field, the page server sends the pen ID and the pending strokes to the registration server 11 for inte ⁇ retation
  • the registration server identifies the user conespondmg to the pen, and uses the user's accumulated handwnting model 822 to inte ⁇ ret the strokes as handwntten text
  • the registration server returns the text to the requesting page server
  • the page server appends the text to the text value of the text field
  • the page server After a penod of inactivity in the zone of the signature field, the page server sends the pen ID 61 and the pending strokes to the registration server 11 for venfication It also sends the application ID 64 associated with the form of which the signature field is part, as well as the form ID 56 and the cu ⁇ ent data content of the form
  • the registration server identifies the user conespondmg to the pen, and uses the user's dynamic signature biometnc 818 to venfy the strokes as the user's signature
  • the registration server uses the application ID 64 and user ID 60 to identify the user's application-specific pnvate signature key It then uses the key to generate a digital signature of the form data, and returns the digital signature to the requesting page server
  • the page server assigns the digital signature to the signature field and sets the associated form's status to frozen
  • the digital signature includes the alias ID 65 of the co ⁇ esponding user This allows a single form to capture multiple users' signatures
  • Form submission occurs via a form hyperlink activation It thus follows the protocol defined in Section 5 2, - 34 - with some form-specific additions
  • the hyperlink activation message sent by the page server 10 to the application 71 also contains the form ID 56 and the cunent data content of the form If the form contains any signature fields, then the application venfies each one by extracting the alias ID 65 associated with the conespondmg digital signature and obtaining the co ⁇ esponding certificate from the registration server 11 5.6 COMMISSION PAYMENT PROTOCOL
  • fees and commissions may be payable from an application provider to a publisher on click-throughs, transactions and sales Commissions on fees and commissions on commissions may also be payable from the publisher to the provider of the p ⁇ nter
  • the hyperlink request ID 52 is used to route a fee or commission credit from the target application provider 70a (e g merchant) to the source application provider 70b (I e publisher), and from the source application provider 70b to the pnnter provider 72
  • the target application receives the hyperlink request ID from the page server 10 when the hyperlink is first activated, as descnbed in Section 5 2
  • the target application needs to credit the source application provider, it sends the application provider credit to the ongmal page server together with the hyperlink request ID
  • the page server uses the hyperlink request ID to identify the source application, and sends the credit on to the relevant registration server 11 together with the source application ID 64, its own server ID 53, and the hyperlink request ID
  • the registration server credits the co ⁇ esponding application provider's account 827 It also notifies the application provider If the application provider needs to credit the p ⁇ nter provider, it sends the p ⁇ nter provider credit to the ongmal page server together with the hyperlink request ID
  • the page server uses the hyperlink request ID to identify the pnnter, and sends the credit on to the relevant registration server together with the p ⁇ nter ID
  • the registration server credits the conespondmg pnnter provider account 814
  • the source application provider is optionally notified of the identity of the target application provider, and the pnnter provider of the identity of the source application provider 6.
  • the pen generally designated by reference numeral 101, includes a housing 102 in the form of a plastics moulding having walls 103 defining an inte ⁇ or space 104 for mounting the pen components
  • the pen top 105 is in operation rotatably mounted at one end 106 of the housing 102
  • a semi-transparent cover 107 is secured to the opposite end 108 of the housing 102
  • the cover 107 is also of moulded plastics, and is formed from semi- transparent matenal in order to enable the user to view the status of the LED mounted withm the housing 102
  • the cover 107 includes a main part 109 which substantially sunounds the end 108 of the housing 102 and a projecting portion 110 which projects back from the mam part 109 and fits within a conespondmg slot 111 formed in the walls 103 of the housmg 102
  • a radio antenna 112 is mounted behind the projecting portion 110, within the housing 102
  • Screw threads 113 sunounding an aperture 113A on the cover 107 are
  • a tn-color status LED 116 on a flex PCB 117 The antenna 112 is also mounted on the flex PCB 117
  • the status LED 116 is mounted at the top of the pen 101 for good all-around visibility
  • the pen can operate both as a normal marking ink pen and as a non-mark g stylus
  • An mk pen cart ⁇ dge 118 with nib 119 and a stylus 120 with stylus mb 121 are mounted side by side within the housing 102 Either the ink cart ⁇ dge nib 119 or the stylus nib 121 can be brought forward through open end 122 of the metal end piece 114, by rotation of the pen top 105
  • Respective slider blocks 123 and 124 are mounted to the mk cart ⁇ dge 118 and stylus 120, respectively
  • a rotatable cam ba ⁇ el 125 is secured to the pen top 105 in operation and a ⁇ anged to rotate therewith
  • the - 35 - cam ba ⁇ el 125 includes a cam 126 in
  • a second flex PCB 129 is mounted on an electronics chassis 130 which sits within the housing 102
  • the second flex PCB 129 mounts an infrared LED 131 for providing infrared radiation for projection onto the surface
  • An image sensor 132 is provided mounted on the second flex PCB 129 for receiving reflected radiation from the surface
  • the second flex PCB 129 also mounts a radio frequency chip 133, which includes an RF transmitter and RF receiver, and a controller chip 134 for controlling operation of the pen 101
  • An optics block 135 (formed from moulded clear plastics) sits withm the cover 107 and projects an infrared beam onto the surface and receives images onto the image sensor 132
  • Power supply wires 136 connect the components on the second flex PCB 129 to battery contacts 137 which are mounted within the cam ba ⁇ el 125
  • a terminal 138 connects to the battery contacts 137 and the cam ba ⁇ el 125
  • a three volt rechargeable battery 139 sits within the cam ba ⁇ e
  • Rubber g ⁇ p pads 141 and 142 are provided towards the end 108 of the housing 102 to assist gnppmg the pen 101, and top 105 also includes a clip 142 for clipping the pen 101 to a pocket 6.2 PEN CONTROLLER
  • the pen 101 is ananged to determine the position of its nib (stylus mb 121 or ink cart ⁇ dge nib 119) by imaging, m the infrared spectrum, an area of the surface m the vicinity of the nib It records the location data from the nearest location tag, and is ananged to calculate the distance of the nib 121 or 119 from the location tab utilising optics 135 and controller chip 134
  • the controller chip 134 calculates the o ⁇ entation of the pen and the nib-to-tag distance from the perspective distortion observed on the imaged tag
  • the pen 101 can transmit the digital ink data (which is encrypted for secunty and packaged for efficient transmission) to the computing system
  • the digital ink data is transmitted as it is formed
  • digital ink data is buffered within the pen 101 (the pen 101 circuitry includes a buffer ananged to store digital ink data for approximately 12 minutes of the pen motion on the surface) and can be transmitted later
  • the controller chip 134 is mounted on the second flex PCB 129 in the pen 101
  • Figure 10 is a block diagram illustrating m more detail the architecture of the controller chip 134 Figure 10 also shows representations of the RF chip 133, the image sensor 132, the t ⁇ -color status LED 116, the IR illumination LED 131, the IR force sensor LED 143, and the force sensor photodiode 144
  • the pen controller chip 134 includes a controlling processor 145 Bus 146 enables the exchange of data between components of the controller chip 134 Flash memory 147 and a 512 KB DRAM 148 are also included
  • An analog-to-digital converter 149 is ananged to convert the analog signal from the force sensor photodiode 144 to a digital signal
  • An image sensor interface 152 interfaces with the image sensor 132
  • a transceiver controller 153 and base - 36 - band circuit 154 are also included to interface with the RF chip 133 which includes an RF circuit 155 and RF resonators and inductors 156 connected to the antenna 112
  • the controlling processor 145 captures and decodes location data from tags from the surface via the image sensor 132, monitors the force sensor photodiode 144, controls the LEDs 116, 131 and 143, and handles short-range radio communication via the radio transceiver 153 It is a medium-performance ( ⁇ 40MHz) general-pmpose RISC processor
  • the processor 145, digital transceiver components (transceiver controller 153 and baseband circuit 154), image sensor interface 152, flash memory 147 and 512KB DRAM 148 are integrated in a single controller ASIC Analog RF components (RF circuit 155 and RF resonators and inductors 156) are provided in the separate RF chip
  • the image sensor is a 215x215 pixel CCD (such a sensor is produced by Matsushita Electronic Co ⁇ oration, and is desc ⁇ bed m a paper by Itakura, K T Nobusada, N Okusenya, R Nagayoshi, and M Ozaki, "A 1mm 50k-P ⁇ xel IT CCD Image Sensor for Miniature Camera System", IEEE Transactions on Electronic Devices, Volt 47, number 1, January 2000, which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference) with an IR filter
  • the controller ASIC 134 enters a quiescent state after a penod of inactivity when the pen 101 is not in contact with a surface It inco ⁇ orates a dedicated circuit 150 which monitors the force sensor photodiode 144 and wakes up the controller 134 via the power manager 151 on a pen-down event
  • the radio transceiver communicates in the unlicensed 900MHz band normally used by cordless telephones, or alternatively in the unlicensed 2 4GHz industnal, scientific and medical (ISM) band, and uses frequency hopping and collision detection to provide interference-free communication
  • ISM scientific and medical
  • the pen inco ⁇ orates an Infrared Data Association (IrDA) interface for short- range communication with a base station or netpage p ⁇ nter
  • IrDA Infrared Data Association
  • the pen 101 includes a pair of orthogonal accelerometers mounted in the normal plane of the pen 101 axis
  • the accelerometers 190 are shown in Figures 9 and 10 in ghost outline
  • each location tag ID can then identify an object of interest rather than a position on the surface For example, if the object is a user interface input element (e g a command button), then the tag ID of each location tag within the area of the input element can directly identify the input element
  • the acceleration measured by the accelerometers m each of the x and y directions is integrated with respect to time to produce an instantaneous velocity and position Since the starting position of the stroke is not known, only relative positions within a stroke are calculated
  • Letter/ A4 sized media using duplexed &Vz" MemjetTM p ⁇ nt engines 602 and 603, as shown m Figures 12 and 12a It uses a straight paper path with the paper 604 passing through the duplexed p ⁇ nt engines 602 and 603 which p ⁇ nt both sides of a sheet simultaneously, in full color and with full bleed
  • An integral binding assembly 605 applies a st ⁇ p of glue along one edge of each pnnted sheet, allowing it to adhere to the previous sheet when pressed agamst it This creates a final bound document 618 which can range in thickness from one sheet to several hundred sheets
  • the replaceable ink cartndge 627 shown in Figure 13 coupled with the duplexed p ⁇ nt engines, has bladders or chambers for sto ⁇ ng fixative, adhesive, and cyan, magenta, yellow, black and infrared inks
  • the cartndge also contains a micro air filter in a base molding
  • the micro air filter interfaces with an air pump 638 inside the p ⁇ nter via a hose 639 - 37 -
  • the ink cartndge is a fully recyclable product with a capacity for pnnting and gluing 3000 pages (1500 sheets)
  • the motonzed media pick-up roller assembly 626 pushes the top sheet directly from the media tray past a paper sensor on the first p ⁇ nt engine 602 into the duplexed MemjetTM pnnthead assembly
  • the two MemjetTM p ⁇ nt engines 602 and 603 are mounted m an opposing in-line sequential configuration along the straight paper path
  • the paper 604 is drawn into the first p ⁇ nt engine 602 by integral, powered pick-up rollers 626
  • the position and size of the paper 604 is sensed and full
  • the paper 604 passes from the duplexed pnnt engines 602 and 603 into the binder assembly 605
  • the pnnted page passes between a powered spike wheel axle 670 with a fibrous support roller and another movable axle with spike wheels and a momentary action glue wheel
  • the movable axle/glue assembly 673 is mounted to a metal support bracket and it is transported forward to interface with the powered axle 670 via gears by action of a camshaft A separate motor powers this camshaft
  • the glue wheel assembly 673 consists of a partially hollow axle 679 with a rotating coupling for the glue supply hose 641 from the ink cartndge 627
  • This axle 679 connects to a glue wheel, which absorbs adhesive by capillary action through radial holes
  • a molded housing 682 su ⁇ ounds the glue wheel, with an opening at the front Pivoting side moldings and sprung outer doors are attached to the metal bracket and hinge out sideways when the rest of the assembly 673 is thrust forward This action exposes the glue wheel through the front of the molded housing 682
  • Tension sp ⁇ ngs close the assembly and effectively cap the glue wheel dunng pe ⁇ ods of inactivity
  • adhesive is applied to one vertical edge on the front side (apart from the first sheet of a document) as it is transported down into the binding assembly 605 7.2
  • the netpage p ⁇ nter controller consists of a controlling processor 750, a factory-installed or field-installed network interface module 625, a radio transceiver (transceiver controller 753, baseband circuit 754, RF circuit 755, and RF resonators and inductors 756), dual raster image processor (RIP) DSPs 757, duplexed pnnt engine controllers 760a and 760b, flash memory 658, and 64MB of DRAM 657, as illustrated in Figure 14
  • the controlling processor handles communication with the network 19 and with local wireless netpage pens 101, senses the help button 617, controls the user interface LEDs 613-616, and feeds and synchronizes the RIP DSPs 757 and pnnt engine contiollers 760 It consists of a medium-performance general-pu ⁇ ose microprocessor
  • the controlling processor 750 communicates with the pnnt engine controllers 760 via a high-speed se ⁇ al bus 659
  • the RIP DSPs raste ⁇ ze and compress page descnptions to the netpage p ⁇ nter' s compressed page format
  • Each p ⁇ nt engine controller expands, dithers and p ⁇ nts page images to its associated MemjetTM pnnthead 350 in real time (l e at over 30 pages per minute)
  • the duplexed p ⁇ nt engine controller s p ⁇ nt both sides of a sheet simultaneously
  • the master p ⁇ nt engine controller 760a controls the paper transport and monitors ink usage in conjunction with the master QA chip 665 and the ink cart ⁇ dge QA chip 761
  • the p ⁇ nter controller's flash memory 658 holds the software for both the processor 750 and the DSPs 757, as well as configuration data This is copied to main memory 657 at boot time
  • the processor 750, DSPs 757, and digital transceiver components are integrated in a single controller ASIC 656
  • Analog RF components RF circuit 755 and RF resonators and inductors 756) are provided in a separate RF chip 762
  • the network interface module 625 is separate, since netpage pnnters allow the network connection to be factory-selected or field-selected Flash memory 658 and the 2x256Mbit (64MB) DRAM 657 is also off-chip
  • the p ⁇ nt engine controllers 760 are provided in separate ASICs
  • a va ⁇ ety of network interface modules 625 are provided, each providing a netpage network interface 751 and optionally a local computer or network interface 752
  • Netpage network Internet interfaces include POTS modems, Hyb ⁇ d Fiber-Coax (HFC) cable modems, ISDN modems, DSL modems, satellite transceivers, cu ⁇ ent and next-generation cellular telephone transcei
  • the radio transceiver 753 communicates in the unlicensed 900MHz band normally used by cordless telephones, or alternatively m the unlicensed 24GHz industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) band, and uses frequency hopping and collision detection to provide interference-free communication
  • the pnnter controller optionally inco ⁇ orates an Infrared Data Association (IrDA) mterface for receivmg data
  • the p ⁇ nter uses the IrDA interface for short-range communication with suitably configured netpage pens
  • the main processor 750 Once the main processor 750 has received and ve ⁇ fied the document's page layouts and page objects, it runs the appropnate RIP software on the DSPs 757
  • the DSPs 757 raste ⁇ ze each page desc ⁇ ption and compress the rastenzed page image
  • the main processor stores each compressed page image in memory
  • the simplest way to load-balance multiple DSPs is to let each DSP rastenze a separate page
  • the DSPs can always be kept busy since an arbitrary number of raste ⁇ zed pages can, in general, be stored in memory This strategy only leads to potentially poor DSP utilization when raste ⁇ zing short documents Watermark regions in the page desc ⁇ ption are raste ⁇ zed to a contone-resolution bi-level bitmap which is losslessly compressed to negligible size and which forms part of the compressed page image
  • the infrared (IR) layer of the p ⁇ nted page contains coded netpage tags at a density of about six per inch Each tag encodes the page ID, tag ID, and control bits, and the data content of each tag is generated du ⁇ ng rastenzation and stored in the compressed page image
  • the mam processor 750 passes back-to-back page images to the duplexed p ⁇ nt engine controllers 760 Each p ⁇ nt engine controller 760 stores the compressed page image in its local memory, and starts the page expansion and p ⁇ nting pipeline Page expansion and p ⁇ nting is pipelined because it is impractical to store an entire 114MB bi-level CMYK+IR page image in memory
  • the p ⁇ nt engine controller 360 operates in a double buffered manner While one page is loaded into DRAM 769 via the high speed senal interface 659, the previously loaded page is read from DRAM 769 and passed through the p ⁇ nt engine controller pipeline Once the page has finished p ⁇ nting, the page just loaded is p ⁇ nted while another page is loaded
  • the first stage of the pipeline expands (at 763) the JPEG-compressed contone CMYK layer, expands (at 764) - 39 - the Group 4 Fax-compressed bi-level black layer, and renders (at 766) the bi-level netpage tag layer according to the tag format defined in section 1 2, all in parallel
  • the second stage dithers (at 765) the contone CMYK layer and composites (at 765) the bi-level black layer over the resulting bi-level CMYK layer
  • the resultant bi-level CMYK+IR dot data is buffered and formatted (at 767) for pnnting on the MemjetTM pnnthead 350 via a set of line buffers Most of these line buffers are stored in the off-chip DRAM
  • the final stage p ⁇ nts the six channels of bi-level dot data (including fixative) to the MemjetTM pnnthead 350 via the pnnthead interface 768
  • p ⁇ nt engine controllers 760 When several p ⁇ nt engine controllers 760 are used in unison, such as in a duplexed configuration, they are synchronized via a shared line sync signal 770 Only one p ⁇ nt engine 760, selected via the external master/slave pin 771, generates the line sync signal 770 onto the shared line
  • the p ⁇ nt engine controller 760 contains a low-speed processor 772 for synchronizing the page expansion and rende ⁇ ng pipeline, configu ⁇ ng the pnnthead 350 via a low-speed se ⁇ al bus 773, and controlling the stepper motors 675, 676
  • the two p ⁇ nt engines each p ⁇ nts 30 Letter pages per minute along the long dimension of the page (11"), giving a line rate of 8 8 kHz at 1600 dpi
  • the two pnnt engines each p ⁇ nts 45 Letter pages per minute along the short dimension of the page (S l ⁇ "), giving a line rate of 102 kHz
  • S l ⁇ the short dimension of the page
  • the sensing device In order to support "single-click" interaction with a tagged region via a sensing device, the sensing device must be able to see at least one entire tag 4 in its field of view no matter where m the region or at what o ⁇ entation it is positioned
  • the required diameter of the field of view of the sensing device is therefore a function of the size and spacing of the tags 4
  • the minimum diameter m of the sensor field of view is obtained when the tags 500, of diameter k, are tiled on an equilateral t ⁇ angular gnd, as shown in Figure 52 and defined in EQ 1 This is achieved when the center-to-center tag spacing is the same as the tag diameter k
  • tags 500 When no overlap is desired in the honzontal direction between successive lines of tags 500, for example to make tag rendenng easier, the tags must be moved apart by a minimum amount given by EQ 3. For a 256-dot diameter tag, u is therefore 40 dots (-06 mm at 1600 dpi) Since this exceeds the quiet area required for the tag, the quiet area can be ignored if tag lines are rendered to not overlap
  • a regular icosahedron such as icosahedron 526 in Figure 53, is composed of twenty equal-sized equilateral t ⁇ angular faces 528 shanng thirty edges 530 and twelve vertices 532, with five of the edges 530 meeting at each of the vertices 532
  • the icosahedron 526 is mscnbed in a target sphere, and each t ⁇ angle 528 of - 40 - the icosahedron 526 is subdivided into an equal number of equal-sized equilateral subdivision tnangles to yield the desired total number of tnangles
  • each edge 530 of the icosahedron is divided into v equal intervals, defining a set of v— 1 points along each edge, and each pair of co ⁇ esponding points along any two adjacent edges is joined by a line parallel to the other shared adjacent edge, the lines so drawn intersect at the vertices of the desired equal-sized and equi
  • n is limited to 2 16 , to allow the use of a 16-bit tag ID without requinng multiple regions to cover the sphere, and K is taken to be 43 mm as above, then r is limited to -310 mm
  • a typical globe has a radius of 160 mm Its projected arc length of -177 mm fits 41 evenly spaced tags with negligible additional spacing Such a globe uses 16812 tags in total 8.1.3 Arbitrary Curved Surface Tag Tiling
  • a tnangle mesh can approximate a surface of arbitrary topography and topology without introducing discontinuities or smgulanties, with the local scale of the mesh being dictated by the local curvature of the surface and an enor bound
  • an effective non-regular tiling of tags can be produced as long as each mesh t ⁇ angle respects a minimum vertex angle and a minimum edge length
  • a tiling is considered effective with respect to a particular sensing device if the field of view of the sensing device is guaranteed to include at least one complete tag at any position of the sensing device on the surface
  • the tiling procedure starts by placing a tag at each vertex of the mesh, so the minimum edge length is the same as the tag diameter k
  • the tiling procedure proceeds by inserting a tag at the midpoint of any edge whose length exceeds a maximum tag separation s As illustrated in Figure 9, the maximum tag spacing 5 is calculated so that if two adjacent tags 4a and 4b are
  • a minimum tag separation / is introduced, where t ⁇ k.
  • the minimum vertex angle then becomes a function of k and /, as shown in EQ 9.
  • t k
  • is constrained to be 60°, i.e. the mesh is constrained to be equilateral.
  • t > k ⁇ can be less than 60° without inserted tags overlapping.
  • the maximum tag separation s must be based on the new minimum tag separation t, in accordance with EQ 10.
  • the minimum vertex angle is no less than 30° (i.e. half of 60°)
  • the minimum vertex angle is typically at least 45°.
  • the orientation of the pen can be characterized by the yaw (z rotation), pitch (x rotation) and roll (y rotation) of the pen, as illustrated in Figure 61. While the yaw of the pen must be unconstrained, it is reasonable to constiain the pitch and roll of the pen as well as the overall tilt of the pen resulting from the combination of pitch and roll.
  • Yaw is conventionally applied after pitch, such that, for example, in the case of a pen device it would define a - 42 - twist about the physical axis rather than a direction in the surface plane
  • the image sensor is mounted off the axis of the pen and the pen's image sensing ability (and hence its yaw sensing ability) is therefore constrained unless the pen is held almost vertically, as discussed below
  • the pen's tilt affects the scale at which surface features are imaged at different points m the field of view, and therefore affects the resolution of the image sensor Since it is impractical to sense the area directly under the pen mb, the pen's tilt also affects the distance from the mb to the center of the imaged area This distance must be known to allow a precise mb position to be denved from the position determined from the tag 8.2.2 Image Sensing
  • the field of view can be modeled as a cone defined by a solid half-angle ⁇ (giving an angular field of view of 2 ⁇ ), and an apex height of D above the surface when the optical axis is vertical
  • giving an angular field of view of 2 ⁇
  • the image sensor is typically rectangular, only the largest elliptical subarea of the image sensor is relevant to guaranteeing that a sufficiently large part of the surface is imaged, as quantified earlier
  • the intersection of the field of view cone with the surface defines an elliptical window on the surface This window is circular when the optical axis is vertical
  • Figure 62 illustrates the geometnc relationship, for a given pitch-related tilt ⁇ of the pen's optical axis, between the pen's nib (point A), the pen's optical axis (CE), and the field of view window (FH)
  • the tilt is defined to be clockwise positive from the vertical
  • the equations which follow apply to both positive and negative tilt
  • ) is given by EQ 12.
  • an image sensor resolution must be chosen so that the imaged area is adequately sampled, I e that the maximum feature frequency is sampled at its Nyquist rate or higher
  • the image sensor is, by definition, required to image at least the entire angular field of view Since the pixel density of the image sensor is uniform, it must image the entire field of view at maximum frequency Given an angular field of view in image space of 2 ⁇ ', an image sensor tilt (l e image plane tilt) with respect to the optical axis of ⁇ ', and a sampling rate of n (where n ⁇ 2 according to Nyquist's theorem), the minimum image sensor resolution q is given by EQ
  • Matching the image plane tilt to the object plane tilt therefore yields a smaller required image sensor size than when the image sensor tilt is fixed at zero, and eliminates perspective distortion from the captured image Vanable image sensor tilt is, however, a relatively cotly option in practice, and also requires greater depth of field
  • Figure 63 illustrates the geometnc relationship, for a given roll-related tilt ⁇ of the pen's optical axis, between the pen's nib (point A), the pen's optical axis (CE), and the field of view window (FH)
  • the tilt is again defined to be clockwise positive from the vertical
  • the preceding equations apply equally to roll-induced tilt
  • ) is zero rather than as defined by EQ 13
  • the magnitude of the tilt range is maximised by choosing a minimum (negative) tilt and a maximum (positive) tilt which have the same image sensor requirement Since, for pitch-induced tilt, the surface is more distant for negative tilt than for positive tilt of the same magnitude, the minimum has a smaller magnitude than the maximum For roll-induced tilt they have the same magnitude
  • the smallest features of the tag 4 are the structures which encode the data bits, and these have a minimum diameter of 8 dots This gives a maximum feature frequency /of about 7 9 per mm at 1600 dpi
  • an equilateral triangular tiling of 256-dot diameter tags with no overlap between successive lines of tags requires a minimum field of view window diameter on the surface of 598 dots, or about 9 5 mm at 1600 dpi
  • the overall pen tilt is thus confined to an elliptical cone whose major angle is 64° m the pitch plane and whose minor angle is 56° in the roll plane
  • Tag image processing is desc ⁇ bed earlier in Section 1 24 It culminates in knowledge of the 2D perspective transform on the tag, as well as the decoded tag data
  • the conespondmg 3D pen transform can be mfened, l e the transform of the pen's physical axis with respect to the surface
  • the pen's physical axis is the axis which is embodied in the pen's shape and which is expenenced by the pen's user It passes through the nib
  • the relationship between the physical axis and the optical axis is illustrated in Figure 64 It is convenient to define three coordinate spaces In sensor space the optical axis coincides with the z axis and the the viewpoint is at the o ⁇ gin In pen space the physical axis coincides with the z axis and the nib is at the ongin In tag space the tag 4 lies in the x-y plane with Us center at the o ⁇ gin
  • the tag transform ttansforms the tag 4 from tag space to sensor space
  • Figure 62 The viewpoint is at E, the sensed point is at G, and the nib is at A.
  • the intersection point G between the optical axis and the surface is refened to as the sensed point.
  • the nib is considered as a small sphere. If the nib is curved, then the tilt of the physical axis affects the offset between the sensed point and the contact point between the nib and the surface.
  • the center point K of the spherical nib, about which the physical axis pivots, is refened to as the pivot point.
  • the nib makes nominal contact with the surface at point A when the optical axis is vertical.
  • KA is defined to be parallel to the optical axis.
  • contact is at point L, as shown in Figure 65.
  • the distance of the pivot point K from the surface e.g. at A or L, is always R .
  • the discrete tag ttansform includes the translation of the tag center from the sensed point, the 3D tag rotation, and the translation of the sensed point from the viewpoint.
  • the vector from the pivot point to the contact point is by definition a surface normal of length R. It is constructed by applying the 3D tag rotation M to a tag space surface normal, normalizing the result, and scaling by R, as shown in EQ 30 and EQ 31. The vector from the sensed point to the contact point is then obtained in accordance with EQ 32.
  • This is transformed into tag space by applying the inverse of the tag transform 3D rotation, and is then added to the vector from the tag center to the sensed point, to yield the vector from the tag center to the contact point in tag space, i.e. on the surface, in accordance with EQ 33.
  • the final step is to infer the pen's 3D orientation from the tag's 3D orientation.
  • the pen's discrete rotations are simply the inverses of the tag's discrete rotations, with the pen's pitch also including the effect of the pitch ( ⁇ - m ⁇ -) of the optical axis with respect to the pen's axis, as defined in EQ 35, EQ 36 and EQ 37. 8.4 INFERRING THE TAG TRANSFORM
  • the image of the tag 4 captured by the image sensor contains perspective distortion due to the position and orientation of the image sensor with respect to the tag.
  • an eight-degree-of-freedom perspective ttansform is infened based on solving the well-understood equations relating the four tag-space and image-space point pairs.
  • the discrete transform steps which give rise to the image of the tag are concatenated symbolically, and a set of simultaneous non-linear equations is obtained by equating conespondmg terms in the concatenated transform and the perspective ttansform. Solving these equations yields the discrete transform steps, which include the desired tag offset from the nib, 3D tag rotation, and viewpoint offset from the surface.
  • the transform of the tag 4 from tag space to image space can be modeled as a concatenation of the following transform steps: • x-y translate (by tag-to-viewpoint offset)
  • Equating the coefficients in EQ 59 with the coefficients in EQ 63 results in EQ 64 to EQ 72, being nine non-linear equations in 11 unknowns
  • Equating the coefficients in EQ 64 to EQ 72 results in EQ 64 to EQ 72, being nine non-linear equations in 11 unknowns
  • These equations are augmented as required by the tngonomet ⁇ c identity relating the sine and cosine of an angle (I e the sine and cosine of any one of yaw, pitch and roll), as shown in EQ 73
  • the conespondmg angle is obtained using a two-argument arctan as shown in EQ 74
  • EQ 66 can be simplified using EQ 64 and EQ 65 to give EQ 75 and then EQ 76 EQ 69 can be simplified using EQ 67 and EQ 68 to give EQ 77 and then EQ 78 EQ 72 can be simplified using EQ 70 and EQ 71 to give EQ 79 and then EQ 80 EQ 76 can be re-wntten as EQ 81, and EQ 78 can be re-w ⁇ tten as EQ 82 Equating EQ 81 and EQ 82 and solving for B yields EQ 83 through EQ 85 and finally EQ 86, which defines B Substituting the value for B into EQ 82 and simplifying yields EQ 87 through EQ 90 and finally EQ 91 , which defines A
  • EQ 70 From EQ 70, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 96 can be obtained From EQ 71, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 97 can be obtained
  • EQ 101 can be obtained From EQ 98 and EQ 99, EQ 102 and then EQ 103 can be obtained
  • EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 115 and then EQ 116 can be obtained From EQ 92 and EQ 116, EQ 117 and then EQ 118 can be obtained From EQ 92 and EQ 116, EQ 119 and then EQ 120 can be obtained In EQ 116, and hence EQ 118 and EQ 120, the sign of the square root is determined by the sign of i, which can be determined from EQ 80, giving EQ 121
  • the sign can be assigned arbittanly to F, since the sign of J is known a pnon If gi is non-zero, then from EQ 70, EQ 127 can be obtained
  • the roll adjustment is introduced as follows The viewport scale (S), inverse focal length (J), and z offset (/) are all computed as descnbed A 3D transform matnx is created from the 2D perspective ttansform matnx The inverses of the viewport scale, focal length projection and z translation are applied to the 3D matnx in reverse order The roll adjustment is then applied by pre-multiplying the matnx by a ⁇ /4 y rotation matnx The roll, pitch and yaw are computed as descnbed Since the roll is positive, the pitch direction is now known The ⁇ /4 roll adjustment is finally subtracted from the roll to give the actual roll
  • the table of Figure 85 shows the 12 degenerate forms of EQ 64 through EQ 71 which result when the yaw is variously zero (or ⁇ ), ⁇ /2 (or 3 ⁇ /2), and non-zero, and the pitch and roll are variously zero and non-zero.
  • the table of Figures 86 and 87 sets out the required logic for detecting and handling cases where the pitch and/or roll are zero, with each case motivated by zeros appearing in the table of Figure 85.
  • the cases in the table of Figure 85 are labelled with the case numbers from the table of Figures 86 and 87. CONCLUSION
  • the present invention has been described with reference to a prefened embodiment and number of specific alternative embodiments.

Abstract

A method and system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system. A user is provided with an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface. The user places a sensing device into an operative position relative to the interface surface. In this operative position, the sensing device senses indicating data indicative of: the identity of the interface surface; and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data. The computer system receives the indicating data from the sensing device, and uses the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software. The computer software is then operated in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element.

Description

COMPUTER SYSTEM INTERFACE SURFACE WITH REFERENCE POINTS
FIELD OF INVENTION
The present invention relates to a method and system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system
The invention has been developed primarily to provide a surface-based interface which allows a user to interact with networked information and to obtain interactive printed matter on demand via high-speed networked color printers Although the invention will largely be described herein with reference to this use, it will be appreciated that the invention is not limited to use in this field
CO-PENDING APPLICATIONS
Various methods, systems and apparatus relating to the present invention are disclosed in the following co- pending applications filed by the applicant or assignee of the present invention simultaneously with the present application PCT/AU00/00518, PCT/AU00/00519, PCT/AU00/00520, PCT/AU00/00521, PCT/AU00/00523,
PCT/AU00/00524, PCT/AU00/00525, PCT/AU00/00526, PCT/AU00/00527, PCT/AU00/00528, PCT/AUOO/00529, PCT/AU00/00530, PCT/AU00/00531 , PCT/AU00/00532, PCT/AU00/00533, PCT/AUOO/00534, PCT/AU00/00535, PCT/AU00/00536, PCT/AU00/00537, PCT/AU00/00538, PCT/AUOO/00539, PCT/AU00/00540, PCT/AUOO/00541 , PCT/AU00/00542, PCT/AU00/00543, PCT/AU00/00544, PCT/AU00/00545, PCT/AU00/00547, PCT/AU00/00546, PCT/AU00/00554,
PCT/AU00/00556, PCT/AUOO/00557, PCT/AU00/00558, PCT/AU00/00559, PCT/AU00/00560, PCT/AU00/00561 , PCT/AU00/00562, PCT/AUOO/00563, PCT/AU00/00564, PCT/AUOO/00566, PCT/AU00/00567, PCT/AU00/00568. PCT/AU00/00569, PCT/AUOO/00570, PCT/AU00/00571 , PCT/AU00/00572, PCT/AUOO/00573. PCT/AU00/00574. PCT/AU00/00575, PCT/AU00/00576, PCT/AU00/00577, PCT/AU00/00578. PCT/AU00/00579, PCT/AU00/00581 , PCT/AU00/00580,
PCT/AU00/00582, PCT/AU00/00587, PCT/AU00/00588, PCT/AU00/00589, PCT/AU00/00583, PCT/AU00/00593, PCT/AU00/00590. PCT/AU00/00591 , PCT/AU00/00592, PCT/AU00/00594, PCT/AU00/00595, PCT/AU00/00596, PCT/AUOO/00597, PCT/AU00/00598, PCT/AU00/00516, and PCT/AU00/00517 The disclosures of these co-pending applications are incorporated herein by cross-reference
BACKGROUND
Presently, a user wishing to interact with a computer system usually does so using a display device such as a computer monitor and an input device such as a keyboard or a computer mouse Whilst such interfaces are useful, they are relatively bulky and non-portable, and can lack the immediacy and expressiveness afforded by a pen applied to paper Moreover, in many situations, paper is a more comfortable and convenient recording medium, due to its superior visual characteristics and its portability Nevertheless, information recorded on paper is generally not as accessible and malleable as information recorded on a computer system Furthermore, unlike a computer interface, a pen applied to paper generally lacks the ability to control computer software
OBJECT
It is an ob)ect of the present invention to combine advantages ot paper-based recordal of information and computer interfacing
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA/ EP - 1 a
SUMMARY OF INVENTION
In a first aspect of the invention, there is provided a method of enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system via an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and a sensing device which, when placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, senses indicating data indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data, the method including the steps of, in the computer system
RECTIFIED SHEET (RULE 91) ISA / EP - 2 -
(a) receiving the indicating data from the sensing device,
0>) using the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operating the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element In a second aspect of the invention, there is provided a method of enabling user interaction with computer software running m a computer system, the method including the steps of providing an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software, and coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and m the computer system (a) receiving indicating data from a sensmg device, the indicating data being indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, the indicative data being sensed when the sensing device is placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data,
(b) using the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and (c) operating the computer software m accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
Preferably, in the first and second aspects, the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, and step (b) includes using the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element In preferred embodiments of the first and second aspects, the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data The method then includes the step of receiving, in the computer system, the movement data, wherein step (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
In a third aspect of the invention, there is provided a system for enabling user interaction with computer software running m a computer system via an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and a sensing device which, when placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, senses indicating data indicative of the identity of the interface surface and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data, the system being configured to, m the computer system
(a) receive the indicating data from the sensing device,
(b) use the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operate the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
In a fourth aspect of the invention, there is provided a system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system, the system including an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, the system being configured to, in the computer system
(a) receive indicating data from a sensing device, the indicating data being indicative of the identity of the interface surface and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, wherem the sensing device when placed in an operative position relative to the mterface surface, senses the indicating data using at least some of the coded data, - 3 -
(b) use the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operate the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
Preferably, in the third and fourth aspects, the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, the system being configured to use the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
In preferred forms of the third and fourth aspects, the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface using at least some of the coded data. The computer system is configured to receive the movement data, wherein (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
Preferably, the coded data takes the form of tags disposed on the interface surface In a particularly preferred form, the tags are pπnted onto a surface in the form of a piece of paper, and are configured to be read by a sensing device in the form of an optical sensing stylus The tags are preferably pπnted using an ink that absorbs near infrared light but is substantially invisible to a human viewer under normal lighting conditions When a user bπngs a sensing end of the stylus close to the surface, one or more of the tags are imaged, interpreted and decoded to provide an indication of the identity of the region from which the tag was imaged, and a position of the sensing device in relation to the surface This information is used to identify an interactive element, and software in an associated computer system is then operated on the basis of instructions associated with the interactive element
Further aspects of the invention will become apparent from reading the following detailed descπption of prefeπed and other embodiments of the invention
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS Preferred and other embodiments of the invention will now be descπbed, by way of non- mitmg example only, with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a schematic of a the relationship between a sample pπnted netpage and its online page descπption, Figure 2 is a schematic view of a interaction between a netpage pen, a netpage pπnter, a netpage page server, and a netpage application server,
Figure 3 illustrates a collection of netpage servers and pnnters interconnected via a network, Figure 4 is a schematic view of a high-level structure of a pπnted netpage and its online page descπption, Figure 5 is a plan view showing a structure of a netpage tag, Figure 6 is a plan view showing a relationship between a set of the tags shown m Figure 5 and a field of view of a netpage sensing device in the form of a netpage pen,
Figure 7 is a flowchart of a tag image processing and decoding algoπthm, Figure 8 is a perspective view of a netpage pen and its associated tag-sensing field-of-view cone, Figure 9 is a perspective exploded view of the netpage pen shown in Figure 8, Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a pen controller for the netpage pen shown m Figures 8 and 9, Figure 11 is a perspective view of a wall-mounted netpage pπnter, Figure 12 is a section through the length of the netpage pπnter of Figure 11,
Figure 12a is an enlarged portion of Figure 12 showing a section of the duplexed pπnt engines and glue wheel assembly, Figure 13 is a detailed view of the ink cartπdge, ink, air and glue paths, and pπnt engines of the netpage pπnter of Figures 11 and 12,
Figure 14 is a schematic block diagram of a pπnter controller for the netpage pπnter shown m Figures 11 and 12,
Figure 15 is a schematic block diagram of duplexed pπnt engine controllers and Memjet™ pnntheads associated with the pπnter controller shown m Figure 14,
Figure 16 is a schematic block diagram of the pπnt engine controller shown Figures 14 and 15, - 4 -
Figure 17 is a perspective view of a single Memjet™ pπnting element, as used in, for example, the netpage pπnter of
Figures 10 to 12,
Figure 18 is a perspective view of a small part of an array of Memjet™ pnnting elements,
Figure 19 is a senes of perspective views illustrating the operating cycle of the Memjet™ pnnting element shown in Figure 13,
Figure 20 is a perspective view of a short segment of a pagewidth Memjet™ pnnthead,
Figure 21 is a schematic view of a user class diagram,
Figure 22 is a schematic view of a pπnter class diagram,
Figure 23 is a schematic view of a pen class diagram, Figure 24 is a schematic view of an application class diagram,
Figure 25 is a schematic view of a document and page descπption class diagram,
Figure 26 is a schematic view of a document and page ownership class diagram,
Figure 27 is a schematic view of a terminal element specialization class diagram,
Figure 28 is a schematic view of a static element specialization class diagram, Figure 29 is a schematic view of a hyperlink element class diagram,
Figure 30 is a schematic view of a hyperlink element specialization class diagram,
Figure 31 is a schematic view of a hyperlmked group class diagram,
Figure 32 is a schematic view of a form class diagram,
Figure 33 is a schematic view of a digital ink class diagram, Figure 34 is a schematic view of a field element specialization class diagram,
Figure 35 is a schematic view of a checkbox field class diagram,
Figure 36 is a schematic view of a text field class diagram,
Figure 37 is a schematic view of a signature field class diagram,
Figure 38 is a flowchart of an input processing algoπthm, Figure 38a is a detailed flowchart of one step of the flowchart of Figure 38,
Figure 39 is a schematic view of a page server command element class diagram,
Figure 40 is a schematic view of a resource descπption class diagram,
Figure 41 is a schematic view of a favoπtes list class diagram,
Figure 42 is a schematic view of a history list class diagram, Figure 43 is a schematic view of a subscπption delivery protocol,
Figure 44 is a schematic view of a hyperlink request class diagram,
Figure 45 is a schematic view of a hyperlink activation protocol,
Figure 46 is a schematic view of a form submission protocol,
Figure 47 is a schematic view of a commission payment protocol, Figure 48 is a schematic view of a set of radial wedges making up a symbol,
Figure 49 is a schematic view of a nng A and B symbol allocation scheme,
Figure 50 is a schematic view of a first πng C and D symbol allocation scheme,
Figure 51 is a schematic view of a second πng C and D symbol allocation scheme,
Figure 52 is a schematic view of a tπangular tag packing, Figure 53 is a perspective view of an lcosahedron,
Figure 54 is a perspective view of an lcosahedral geodesic with frequency 3,
Figure 55 is a schematic view of a minimum tag spacing,
Figure 56 is a schematic view of a minimum tag spacing which avoids overlap, - 5 -
Figure 57 is a schematic view of a first tag insertion case,
Figure 58 is a schematic view of a second tag insertion case,
Figure 59 is a schematic view of a third tag insertion case,
Figure 60 is a schematic view of a fourth tag insertion case, Figure 61 is a schematic view of a pen onentation relative to a surface,
Figure 62 is a schematic view of a pen pitch geometry,
Figure 63 is a schematic view of a pen roll geometry,
Figure 64 is a schematic view of a pen coordinate space showing physical and optical axes of a pen,
Figure 65 is a schematic view of a curved nib geometry, Figure 66 is a schematic view of an interaction between sampling frequency and tag frequency,
Figure 67 is a table containing equations numbered 1 to 10,
Figure 68 is a table containing equations numbered 11 to 20,
Figure 69 is a table containing equations numbered 21 to 26,
Figure 70 is a table containing equations numbered 27 to 34, Figure 71 is a table containing equations numbered 35 to 41 ,
Figure 72 is a table containing equations numbered 42 to 44,
Figure 73 is a table containing equations numbered 45 to 47,
Figure 74 is a table containing equations numbered 48 to 51 ,
Figure 75 is a table containing equations numbered 52 to 54, Figure 76 is a table containing equations numbered 55 to 57,
Figure 77 is a table containing equations numbered 58 to 59,
Figure 78 is a table containing equations numbered 60 to 63,
Figure 79 is a table containing equations numbered 64 to 74,
Figure 80 is a table containing equations numbered 75 to 86, Figure 81 is a table containing equations numbered 87 to 99,
Figure 82 is a table containing equations numbered 100 to 111 ,
Figure 83 is a table containing equations numbered 112 to 120,
Figure 84 is a table containing equations numbered 121 to 129,
Figure 85 is a table containing a set of degenerate forms of equations 64 to 71, Figure 86 is a first part of a table containing conditions and special handling for zero pitch and zero roll, and
Figure 87 is a the second part of the table of Figure 86
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED AND OTHER EMBODIMENTS
Note Memjet™ is a trade mark of Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd, Australia
In the prefeπed embodiment, the invention is configured to work with the netpage networked computer system, a detailed overview of which follows It will be appreciated that not every implementation will necessaπly embody all or even most of the specific details and extensions discussed below in relation to the basic system However, the system is descπbed m its most complete form to reduce the need for external reference when attempting to understand the context in which the preferred embodiments and aspects of the present invention operate
In bπef summary, the prefeπed form of the netpage system employs a computer interface in the form of a mapped surface, that is, a physical surface which contains references to a map of the surface maintained in a computer system The map references can be quened by an appropπate sensing device Depending upon the specific implementation, the map references may be encoded visibly or invisibly, and defined in such a way that a local query on the mapped surface yields an unambiguous map reference both within the map and among different maps The computer system can contain information about features on the mapped surface, and such information can be retneved based on - 6 - map references supplied by a sensing device used with the mapped surface The information thus retπeved can take the form of actions which are initiated by the computer system on behalf of the operator in response to the operator's interaction with the surface features
In its preferred form, the netpage system relies on the production of, and human interaction with, netpages These are pages of text, graphics and images pπnted on ordinary paper, but which work like interactive web pages Information is encoded on each page using ink which is substantially invisible to the unaided human eye The ink, however, and thereby the coded data, can be sensed by an optically imaging pen and transmitted to the netpage system
In the prefeπed form, active buttons and hyperlinks on each page can be clicked with the pen to request information from the network or to signal preferences to a network server In one embodiment, text wntten by hand on a netpage is automatically recognized and converted to computer text in the netpage system, allowing forms to be filled in
In other embodiments, signatures recorded on a netpage are automatically venfied, allowing e-commerce transactions to be securely authonzed
As illustrated in Figure 1 , a pnnted netpage 1 can represent a interactive form which can be filled by the user both physically, on the pπnted page, and "electronically", via communication between the pen and the netpage system The example shows a "Request" form containing name and address fields and a submit button The netpage consists of graphic data 2 pnnted using visible ink, and coded data 3 pnnted as a collection of tags 4 using invisible ink The coπesponding page descπption 5, stored on the netpage network, descπbes the individual elements of the netpage In particular it descnbes the type and spatial extent (zone) of each interactive element (l e text field or button in the example), to allow the netpage system to correctly interpret input via the netpage The submit button 6, for example, has a zone 7 which coπesponds to the spatial extent of the coπesponding graphic 8
As illustrated in Figure 2, the netpage pen 101, a preferred form of which is shown m Figures 8 and 9 and descπbed in more detail below, works in conjunction with a netpage pπnter 601, an Internet-connected pnnting appliance for home, office or mobile use The pen is wireless and communicates securely with the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link 9 The netpage pπnter 601 , a prefeπed form of which is shown m Figures 11 to 13 and descnbed in more detail below, is able to deliver, penodically or on demand, personalized newspapers, magazines, catalogs, brochures and other publications, all pnnted at high quality as interactive netpages Unlike a personal computer, the netpage pnnter is an appliance which can be, for example, wall-mounted adjacent to an area where the morning news is first consumed, such as a user's kitchen, near a breakfast table, or near the household's point of departure for the day It also comes in tabletop, desktop, portable and miniature versions
Netpages pπnted at their point of consumption combine the ease-of-use of paper with the timeliness and interactivity of an interactive medium
As shown in Figure 2, the netpage pen 101 interacts with the coded data on a pnnted netpage 1 and communicates, via a short-range radio link 9, the interaction to a netpage pnnter The pnnter 601 sends the interaction to the relevant netpage page server 10 for interpretation In appropnate circumstances, the page server sends a coπesponding message to application computer software running on a netpage application server 13 The application server may m turn send a response which is pπnted on the onginating pπnter
The netpage system is made considerably more convenient the prefeπed embodiment by being used in conjunction with high-speed microelectromecha cal system (MEMS) based inkjet (Memjet™) pnnters In the prefeπed form of this technology, relatively high-speed and high-quality pnnting is made more affordable to consumers In its prefeπed form, a netpage publication has the physical charactenstics of a traditional newsmagazine, such as a set of letter- size glossy pages pnnted in full color on both sides, bound together for easy navigation and comfortable handling
The netpage pnnter exploits the growing availability of broadband Internet access Cable service is available to 95% of households m the United States, and cable modem service offenng broadband Internet access is already available to 20% of these The netpage pnnter can also operate with slower connections, but with longer delivery times and lower image quality Indeed, the netpage system can be enabled using existing consumer inkjet and laser pnnters, although the system will operate more slowly and will therefore be less acceptable from a consumer's point of view In other embodiments, the netpage system is hosted on a pnvate intranet In still other embodiments, the netpage system is hosted on a single computer or computer-enabled device, such as a pπnter
Netpage publication servers 14 on the netpage network are configured to deliver pnnt-quahty publications to netpage pnnters Peπodical publications are delivered automatically to subscπbing netpage pnnters via pointcastmg and multicasting Internet protocols Personalized publications are filtered and formatted according to individual user profiles A netpage pnnter can be configured to support any number of pens, and a pen can work with any number of netpage pnnters In the prefeπed implementation, each netpage pen has a unique identifier A household may have a collection of colored netpage pens, one assigned to each member of the family This allows each user to maintain a distinct profile with respect to a netpage publication server or application server
A netpage pen can also be registered with a netpage registration server 11 and linked to one or more payment card accounts This allows e-commerce payments to be securely authonzed using the netpage pen The netpage registration server compares the signature captured by the netpage pen with a previously registered signature, allowing it to authenticate the user's identity to an e-commerce server Other biometrics can also be used to venfy identity A version of the netpage pen includes fingerpπnt scanning, venfied in a similar way by the netpage registration server
Although a netpage pnnter may deliver penodicals such as the morning newspaper without user intervention, it can be configured never to deliver unsolicited junk mail In its prefeπed form, it only delivers penodicals from subscnbed or otherwise authonzed sources In this respect, the netpage pπnter is unlike a fax machine or e-mail account which is visible to any junk mailer who knows the telephone number or email address 1 NETPAGE SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Each object model m the system is descπbed using a Unified Modeling Language (UML) class diagram A class diagram consists of a set of object classes connected by relationships, and two kinds of relationships are of interest here associations and generalizations An association represents some kind of relationship between objects, I e between instances of classes A generalization relates actual classes, and can be understood in the following way if a class is thought of as the set of all objects of that class, and class A is a generalization of class B, then B is simply a subset of A The UML does not directly support second-order modelling - 1 e classes of classes
Each class is drawn as a rectangle labelled with the name of the class It contains a list of the attnbutes of the class, separated from the name by a honzontal line, and a list of the operations of the class, separated from the attπbute list by a honzontal line In the class diagrams which follow, however, operations are never modelled
An association is drawn as a line joining two classes, optionally labelled at either end with the multiplicity of the association The default multiplicity is one An asteπsk (*) indicates a multiplicity of "many", l e zero or more Each association is optionally labelled with its name, and is also optionally labelled at either end with the role of the coπesponding class An open diamond indicates an aggregation association ("ls-part-of '), and is drawn at the aggregator end of the association line
A generalization relationship ("ls-a") is drawn as a solid line joining two classes, with an aπow (in the form of an open tnangle) at the generalization end
When a class diagram is broken up into multiple diagrams, any class which is duplicated is shown with a dashed outline in all but the main diagram which defines it It is shown with attnbutes only where it is defined 1.1 NETPAGES
Netpages are the foundation on which a netpage network is built They provide a paper-based user interface to published information and interactive services
A netpage consists of a pπnted page (or other surface region) invisibly tagged with references to an online - 8 - descπption of the page The online page descπption is maintained persistently by a netpage page server The page descπption descπbes the visible layout and content of the page, including text, graphics and images It also descπbes the input elements on the page, including buttons, hyperlinks, and input fields A netpage allows markings made with a netpage pen on its surface to be simultaneously captured and processed by the netpage system Multiple netpages can share the same page descnption However, to allow input through otherwise identical pages to be distinguished, each netpage is assigned a unique page identifier This page ID has sufficient precision to distinguish between a very large number of netpages
Each reference to the page descnption is encoded m a pnnted tag The tag identifies the unique page on which it appears, and thereby indirectly identifies the page descπption The tag also identifies its own position on the page Characteπstics of the tags are descπbed m more detail below
Tags are pπnted in infrared-absorptive ink on any substrate which is infrared-reflective, such as ordinary paper Near-infrared wavelengths are invisible to the human eye but are easily sensed by a solid-state image sensor with an appropπate filter
A tag is sensed by an area image sensor in the netpage pen, and the tag data is transmitted to the netpage system via the nearest netpage pπnter The pen is wireless and communicates with the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link Tags are sufficiently small and densely aπanged that the pen can reliably image at least one tag even on a single click on the page It is important that the pen recognize the page ID and position on every interaction with the page, since the interaction is stateless Tags are eπor-coπectably encoded to make them partially tolerant to surface damage
The netpage page server maintains a unique page instance for each pπnted netpage, allowing it to maintain a distinct set of user-supplied values for input fields in the page descπption for each pπnted netpage
The relationship between the page descπption, the page instance, and the pnnted netpage is shown in Figure 4 The page instance is associated with both the netpage pπnter which pπnted it and, if known, the netpage user who requested it
1.2 NETPAGE TAGS 1.2.1 Tag Data Content
In a prefeπed form, each tag identifies the region in which it appears, and the location of that tag withm the region A tag may also contain flags which relate to the region as a whole or to the tag One or more flag bits may, for example, signal a tag sensing device to provide feedback indicative of a function associated with the immediate area of the tag, without the sensing device having to refer to a descnption of the region A netpage pen may, for example, illuminate an "active area" LED when in the zone of a hyperlink
As will be more clearly explained below, in a prefeπed embodiment, each tag contains an easily recognized invaπant structure which aids initial detection, and which assists m minimizing the effect of any warp induced by the surface or by the sensing process The tags preferably tile the entire page, and are sufficiently small and densely aπanged that the pen can reliably image at least one tag even on a single click on the page It is important that the pen recognize the page ID and position on every interaction with the page, since the interaction is stateless
In a prefeπed embodiment, the region to which a tag refers coincides with an entire page, and the region ID encoded in the tag is therefore synonymous with the page ID of the page on which the tag appears In other embodiments, the region to which a tag refers can be an arbitrary subregion of a page or other surface For example, it can coincide with the zone of an interactive element, in which case the region ID can directly identify the interactive element Table 1. Tag data
Figure imgf000011_0001
- 9 -
Figure imgf000012_0001
Each tag contains 120 bits of information, typically allocated as shown in Table 1 Assuming a maximum tag density of 64 per square inch, a 16-bit tag ID supports a region size of up to 1024 square inches Larger regions can be mapped continuously without increasing the tag ID precision simply by using abutting regions and maps The 100-bit region ID allows 2100 (-1030 or a million tπllion tnlhon) different regions to be uniquely identified
1.2.2 Tag Data Encoding
The 120 bits of tag data are redundantly encoded using a (15, 5) Reed-Solomon code This yields 360 encoded bits consisting of 6 codewords of 15 4-bit symbols each The (15, 5) code allows up to 5 symbol eπors to be coπected per codeword, l e it is tolerant of a symbol eπor rate of up to 33% per codeword Each 4-bit symbol is represented a spatially coherent way in the tag, and the symbols of the six codewords are interleaved spatially within the tag This ensures that a burst eπor (an eπor affecting multiple spatially adjacent bits) damages a minimum number of symbols overall and a minimum number of symbols in any one codeword, thus maximising the likelihood that the burst eπor can be fully coπected
1.2.3 Physical Tag Structure The physical representation of the tag, shown in Figure 5, includes fixed target structures 15, 16, 17 and vanable data areas 18 The fixed target structures allow a sensing device such as the netpage pen to detect the tag and infer its three-dimensional oπentation relative to the sensor The data areas contain representations of the individual bits of the encoded tag data
To achieve proper tag reproduction, the tag is rendered at a resolution of 256x256 dots When pnnted at 1600 dots per mch this yields a tag with a diameter of about 4 mm At this resolution the tag is designed to be suπounded by a "quiet area" of radius 16 dots Since the quiet area is also contnbuted by adjacent tags, it only adds 16 dots to the effective diameter of the tag
The tag includes six target structures a detection nng 15, an oπentation axis target 16, and four perspective targets 17 The detection nng 15 allows the sensing device to initially detect the tag 4 The πng is easy to detect because it is rotationally invaπant and because a simple coπection of its aspect ratio removes most of the effects of perspective distortion The oπentation axis 16 allows the sensing device to determine the approximate planar oπentation of the tag due to the yaw of the sensor The oπentation axis is skewed to yield a unique oπentation The four perspective targets 17 allow the sensing device to infer an accurate two-dimensional perspective transform of the tag and hence an accurate three-dimensional position and onentation of the tag relative to the sensor
All target structures are redundantly large to improve their immunity to noise
The overall tag shape is circular This supports, amongst other things, optimal tag packing on an megular tπangular gnd In combination with the circular detection πng 15, this makes a circular aπangement of data bits within the tag optimal To maximise its size, each data bit is represented by a radial wedge 510 in the form of an area bounded by two radial lines 512, a radially inner arc 514 and a radially outer arc 516 Each wedge 510 has a minimum dimension of 8 dots at 1600 dpi and is designed so that its base (l e its inner arc 514), is at least equal to this minimum dimension The radial height of the wedge 510 is always equal to the minimum dimension Each 4-bit data symbol is represented by an aπay 518 of 2x2 wedges 510, as best shown m Figure 48
The 15 4-bit data symbols of each of the six codewords are allocated to the four concentnc symbol πngs 18a to 18d, shown Figure 5, in interleaved fashion as shown in Figures 49 to 51 Symbols of first to sixth codewords 520- 525 are allocated alternately m circular progression around the tag - 10 -
The interleaving is designed to maximise the average spatial distance between any two symbols of the same codeword
In order to support "single-click" interaction with a tagged region via a sensing device, the sensing device must be able to see at least one entire tag in its field of view no matter where in the region or at what oπentation it is positioned The required diameter of the field of view of the sensing device is therefore a function of the size and spacing of the tags
Assuming a circular tag shape, the minimum diameter of the sensor field of view is obtained when the tags are tiled on a equilateral tπangular gnd, as shown in Figure 6 1.2.4 Tag Image Processing and Decoding The tag image processing and decoding performed by a sensing device such as the netpage pen is shown in
Figure 7 While a captured image is being acquired from the image sensor, the dynamic range of the image is determined (at 20) The center of the range is then chosen as the binary threshold for the image 21 The image is then thresholded and segmented into connected pixel regions (l e shapes 23) (at 22) Shapes which are too small to represent tag target structures are discarded The size and centroid of each shape is also computed Binary shape moments 25 are then computed (at 24) for each shape, and these provide the basis for subsequently locating target structures Central shape moments are by their nature mvanant of position, and can be easily made mvanant of scale, aspect ratio and rotation
The πng target structure 15 is the first to be located (at 26) A πng has the advantage of being very well behaved when perspective-distorted Matching proceeds by aspect-normalizing and rotation-normalizing each shape's moments Once its second-order moments are normalized the πng is easy to recognize even if the perspective distortion was significant The πng's ongmal aspect and rotation 27 together provide a useful approximation of the perspective transform
The axis target structure 16 is the next to be located (at 28) Matching proceeds by applying the πng's normalizations to each shape's moments, and rotation-normalizing the resulting moments Once its second-order moments are normalized the axis target is easily recognized Note that one third order moment is required to disambiguate the two possible oπentations of the axis The shape is deliberately skewed to one side to make this possible Note also that it is only possible to rotation-normalize the axis target after it has had the πng's normalizations applied, since the perspective distortion can hide the axis target's axis The axis target's ongmal rotation provides a useful approximation of the tag's rotation due to pen yaw 29 The four perspective target structures 17 are the last to be located (at 30) Good estimates of their positions are computed based on their known spatial relationships to the πng and axis targets, the aspect and rotation of the πng, and the rotation of the axis Matching proceeds by applying the nng's normalizations to each shape's moments Once their second-order moments are normalized the circular perspective targets are easy to recognize, and the target closest to each estimated position is taken as a match The ongmal centroids of the four perspective targets are then taken to be the perspective-distorted corners 31 of a square of known size in tag space, and an eight-degree-of- freedom perspective transform 33 is infeπed (at 32) based on solving the well-understood equations relating the four tag-space and image- space point pairs (see Heckbert, P , Fundamentals of Texture Mapping and Image Warping, Masters Thesis, Dept of EECS, U of California at Berkeley, Technical Report No UCB/CSD 89/516, June 1989, the contents of which are herein incoφorated by cross-reference) The infeπed tag-space to image-space perspective transform is used to project (at 36) each known data bit position in tag space into image space where the real-valued position is used to bihnearly mteφolate (at 36) the four relevant adjacent pixels in the input image The previously computed image threshold 21 is used to threshold the result to produce the final bit value 37
Once all 360 data bits 37 have been obtained in this way, each of the six 60-bit Reed-Solomon codewords is - 11 - decoded (at 38) to yield 20 decoded bits 39, or 120 decoded bits in total Note that the codeword symbols are sampled in codeword order, so that codewords are implicitly de-interleaved dunng the sampling process
The nng target 15 is only sought in a subarea of the image whose relationship to the image guarantees that the nng, if found, is part of a complete tag If a complete tag is not found and successfully decoded, then no pen position is recorded for the cuπent frame Given adequate processing power and ideally a non-minimal field of view 193, an alternative strategy involves seeking another tag in the cuπent image
The obtained tag data indicates the identity of the region containing the tag and the position of the tag within the region An accurate position 35 of the pen nib in the region, as well as the overall oπentation 35 of the pen, is then infeπed (at 34) from the perspective transform 33 observed on the tag and the known spatial relationship between the pen's physical axis and the pen's optical axis
1.2.5 Tag Map
Decoding a tag results m a region ID, a tag ID, and a tag-relative pen transform Before the tag ID and the tag-relative pen location can be translated into an absolute location withm the tagged region, the location of the tag within the region must be known This is given by a tag map, a function which maps each tag ID in a tagged region to a coπesponding location The tag map class diagram is shown in Figure 22, as part of the netpage pπnter class diagram
A tag map reflects the scheme used to tile the surface region with tags, and this can vary according to surface type When multiple tagged regions share the same tiling scheme and the same tag numbeπng scheme, they can also share the same tag map
The tag map for a region must be retπevable via the region ID Thus, given a region ID, a tag ID and a pen transform, the tag map can be retrieved, the tag ID can be translated into an absolute tag location within the region, and the tag-relative pen location can be added to the tag location to yield an absolute pen location within the region
1.2.6 Tagging Schemes
Two distinct surface coding schemes are of interest, both of which use the tag structure descnbed earlier in this section The prefeπed coding scheme uses "location-indicating" tags as already discussed An alternative coding scheme uses object-indicating tags
A location-indicating tag contains a tag ID which, when translated through the tag map associated with the tagged region, yields a unique tag location within the region The tag-relative location of the pen is added to this tag location to yield the location of the pen withm the region This m turn is used to determine the location of the pen relative to a user interface element in the page descnption associated with the region Not only is the user interface element itself identified, but a location relative to the user interface element is identified Location-indicating tags therefore trivially support the capture of an absolute pen path in the zone of a particular user interface element
An object-indicating tag contains a tag ID which directly identifies a user interface element in the page descnption associated with the region All the tags m the zone of the user interface element identify the user interface element, making them all identical and therefore indistinguishable Object-indicating tags do not, therefore, support the capture of an absolute pen path They do, however, support the capture of a relative pen path So long as the position sampling frequency exceeds twice the encountered tag frequency, the displacement from one sampled pen position to the next within a stroke can be unambiguously determined
Assume a sampling wavelength of λs and a tag wavelength of λτ, with a relationship as defined m EQ 38. For two adjacent position samples P, and P,+!, one of EQ 39 and EQ 40 will hold Assuming both equations hold leads to the relationship defined in EQ 41.
Since EQ 41 contradicts EQ 38, the assumption that both EQ 39 and EQ 40 hold must be incoπect, and the choice is therefore unambiguous, as stated
The illustration m Figure 60 shows four tags 500 and a one-dimensional stroke of six sample positions 582 - 12 - which satisfy EQ 38 Possible aliases 584 of the sample positions are also shown From inspection, if the distance from one sample position to the next is λs, then the distance from a sample position to the alias of the next sample position exceeds λs
If the tag wavelength λτιs 47 mm, as discussed m earlier, then the sampling wavelength λs must be less than 235 mm If the temporal sampling frequency is 100 Hz as required for accurate handwπting recognition, then the pen speed must be less than 235 mm/s to satisfy EQ 38
With either tagging scheme, the tags function m cooperation with associated visual elements on the netpage as user interactive elements in that a user can interact with the pπnted page using an appropπate sensing device in order for tag data to be read by the sensing device and for an appropπate response to be generated in the netpage system 1.3 DOCUMENT AND PAGE DESCRIPTIONS
A prefeπed embodiment of a document and page descnption class diagram is shown in Figures 25 and 26 In the netpage system a document is descnbed at three levels At the most abstract level the document 836 has a hierarchical structure whose terminal elements 839 are associated with content objects 840 such as text objects, text style objects, image objects, etc Once the document is pπnted on a pπnter with a particular page size and according to a particular user's scale factor preference, the document is paginated and otherwise formatted Formatted terminal elements 835 will in some cases be associated with content objects which are different from those associated with their conespondmg terminal elements, particularly where the content objects are style-related Each pπnted instance of a document and page is also descπbed separately, to allow input captured through a particular page instance 830 to be recorded separately from input captured through other mstances of the same page descπption The presence of the most abstract document descπption on the page server allows a user to request a copy of a document without being forced to accept the source document's specific format The user may be requesting a copy through a pπnter with a different page size, for example Conversely, the presence of the formatted document descnption on the page server allows the page server to efficiently inteφret user actions on a particular pπnted page
A formatted document 834 consists of a set of formatted page descπptions 5, each of which consists of a set of formatted terminal elements 835 Each formatted element has a spatial extent or zone 58 on the page This defines the active area of input elements such as hyperlinks and input fields
A document instance 831 coπesponds to a formatted document 834 It consists of a set of page instances 830, each of which coπesponds to a page descπption 5 of the formatted document Each page instance 830 descnbes a single unique pπnted netpage 1, and records the page ID 50 of the netpage A page instance is not part of a document instance if it represents a copy of a page requested isolation
A page instance consists of a set of terminal element instances 832 An element instance only exists if it records instance-specific information Thus, a hyperlink instance exists for a hyperlink element because it records a transaction ID 55 which is specific to the page instance, and a field instance exists for a field element because it records input specific to the page instance An element instance does not exist, however, for static elements such as textflows A terminal element can be a static element 843, a hyperlink element 844, a field element 845 or a page server command element 846, as shown m Figure 27 A static element 843 can be a style element 847 with an associated style object 854, a textflow element 848 with an associated styled text object 855, an image element 849 with an associated image element 856, a graphic element 850 with an associated graphic object 857, a video clip element 851 with an associated video clip object 858, an audio clip element 852 with an associated audio clip object 859, or a scnpt element 853 with an associated scnpt object 860, as shown in Figure 28
A page instance has a background field 833 which is used to record any digital ink captured on the page which does not apply to a specific input element
In the prefeπed form of the invention, a tag map 811 is associated with each page instance to allow tags on - 13 - the page to be translated into locations on the page
1.4 THE NETPAGE NETWORK
In a prefeπed embodiment, a netpage network consists of a distnbuted set of netpage page servers 10, netpage registration servers 11, netpage ID servers 12, netpage application servers 13, netpage publication servers 14, and netpage pnnters 601 connected via a network 19 such as the Internet, as shown in Figure 3
The netpage registration server 11 is a server which records relationships between users, pens, pnnters, applications and publications, and thereby authoπzes vanous network activities It authenticates users and acts as a signing proxy on behalf of authenticated users in application transactions It also provides handwnting recognition services As descπbed above, a netpage page server 10 maintains persistent information about page descπptions and page instances The netpage network includes any number of page servers, each handling a subset of page instances Since a page server also maintains user input values for each page instance, clients such as netpage pnnters send netpage input directly to the appropnate page server The page server inteφrets any such input relative to the descπption of the coπesponding page
A netpage ID server 12 allocates document IDs 51 on demand, and provides load-balancing of page servers via its ID allocation scheme
A netpage pnnter uses the Internet Distnbuted Name System (DNS), or similar, to resolve a netpage page ID 50 into the network address of the netpage page server handling the coπesponding page instance
A netpage application server 13 is a server which hosts interactive netpage applications A netpage publication server 14 is an application server which publishes netpage documents to netpage pnnters They are descπbed in detail in Section 2
Netpage servers can be hosted on a vaπety of network server platforms from manufacturers such as IBM,
Hewlett-Packard, and Sun Multiple netpage servers can run concuπently on a single host, and a single server can be distπbuted over a number of hosts Some or all of the functionality provided by netpage servers, and in particular the functionality provided by the ID server and the page server, can also be provided directly in a netpage appliance such as a netpage pπnter, in a computer workstation, or on a local network
1.5 THE NETPAGE PRINTER
The netpage pπnter 601 is an appliance which is registered with the netpage system and pπnts netpage documents on demand and via subscπption Each pπnter has a unique pπnter ID 62, and is connected to the netpage network via a network such as the Internet, ideally via a broadband connection Apart from identity and secuπty settings in non-volatile memory, the netpage pπnter contains no persistent storage As far as a user is concerned, "the network is the computer" Netpages function interactively across space and time with the help of the distnbuted netpage page servers 10, independently of particular netpage pnnters
The netpage pπnter receives subscnbed netpage documents from netpage publication servers 14 Each document is distπbuted in two parts the page layouts, and the actual text and image objects which populate the pages Because of personalization, page layouts are typically specific to a particular subscnber and so are pomtcast to the subscnber's pπnter via the appropπate page server Text and image objects, on the other hand, are typically shared with other subscπbers, and so are multicast to all subscπbers' pnnters and the appropπate page servers
The netpage publication server optimizes the segmentation of document content into pointcasts and multicasts After receiving the pomtcast of a document's page layouts, the pnnter knows which multicasts, if any, to listen to
Once the pπnter has received the complete page layouts and objects that define the document to be pπnted, it can pπnt the document
The pnnter rastenzes and pnnts odd and even pages simultaneously on both sides of the sheet It contains duplexed pnnt engine controllers 760 and pπnt engines utilizing Memjet™ pnntheads 350 for this puφose - 14 -
The pnnting process consists of two decoupled stages rastenzation of page descπptions, and expansion and pnnting of page images The raster image processor (RIP) consists of one or more standard DSPs 757 running in parallel The duplexed pnnt engine controllers consist of custom processors which expand, dither and pnnt page images in real time, synchronized with the operation of the pnntheads in the pnnt engines Pnnters not enabled for IR pnnting have the option to pnnt tags using IR-absoφtive black ink, although this restricts tags to otherwise empty areas of the page Although such pages have more limited functionality than IR-pnnted pages, they are still classed as netpages
A normal netpage pπnter pπnts netpages on sheets of paper More specialised netpage pnnters may pnnt onto more specialised surfaces, such as globes Each pnnter supports at least one surface type, and supports at least one tag tiling scheme, and hence tag map, for each surface type The tag map 811 which descnbes the tag tiling scheme actually used to pπnt a document becomes associated with that document so that the document's tags can be coπectly mteφreted
Figure 2 shows the netpage pπnter class diagram, reflecting pπnter-related information maintained by a registration server 11 on the netpage network
A prefeπed embodiment of the netpage pπnter is descπbed in greater detail in Section 6 below, with reference to Figures 11 to 16
1.5.1 Memjet™ Printheads
The netpage system can operate using pnnters made with a wide range of digital pπnting technologies, including thermal inkjet, piezoelectnc inkjet, laser electrophotographic, and others However, for wide consumer acceptance, it is desirable that a netpage pπnter have the following characteπstics • photographic quality color pnnting
• high quality text pπnting
• high reliability
• low pπnter cost
Figure imgf000017_0001
• low paper cost
• simple operation
• nearly silent pπnting
• high pπnting speed
• simultaneous double sided pπnting • compact form factor
• low power consumption
No commercially available pnnting technology has all of these characteπstics
To enable to production of pnnters with these characteπstics, the present applicant has invented a new pπnt technology, refeπed to as Memjet™ technology Memjet™ is a drop-on-demand inkjet technology that incoφorates pagewidth pnntheads fabncated using microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) technology Figure 17 shows a single pnnting element 300 of a Memjet™ pnnthead The netpage wallpnnter incorporates 168960 pπnting elements 300 to form a 1600 dpi pagewidth duplex pπnter This pπnter simultaneously pπnts cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and infrared inks as well as paper conditioner and ink fixative
The pπnting element 300 is approximately 110 microns long by 32 microns wide Aπays of these pnnting elements are formed on a silicon substrate 301 that incoφorates CMOS logic, data transfer, timing, and dπve circuits (not shown)
Major elements of the pπnting element 300 are the nozzle 302, the nozzle nm 303, the nozzle chamber 304, the fluidic seal 305, the ink channel nm 306, the lever arm 307, the active actuator beam pair 308, the passive actuator - 15 - beam pair 309, the active actuator anchor 310, the passive actuator anchor 311, and the ink mlet 312
The active actuator beam pair 308 is mechanically joined to the passive actuator beam pair 309 at the join 319 Both beams pairs are anchored at their respective anchor points 310 and 311 The combination of elements 308, 309, 310, 311, and 319 form a cantilevered electrothermal bend actuator 320 Figure 18 shows a small part of an array of pπnting elements 300, including a cross section 315 of a pnntmg element 300 The cross section 315 is shown without ink, to clearly show the mk inlet 312 that passes through the silicon wafer 301
Figures 19(a), 190)) and 19(c) show the operating cycle of a Memjet™ pnnting element 300 Figure 19(a) shows the quiescent position of the ink meniscus 316 pπor to pπnting an ink droplet Ink is retained in the nozzle chamber by surface tension at the ink meniscus 316 and at the fluidic seal 305 formed between the nozzle chamber 304 and the ink channel nm 306
While pnnting, the pnnthead CMOS circuitry distnbutes data from the pπnt engine controller to the coπect pπnting element, latches the data, and buffers the data to dπve the electrodes 318 of the active actuator beam pair 308 This causes an electncal cuπent to pass through the beam pair 308 for about one microsecond, resulting in Joule heating The temperature increase resulting from Joule heating causes the beam pair 308 to expand As the passive actuator beam pair 309 is not heated, it does not expand, resulting in a stress difference between the two beam pairs This stress difference is partially resolved by the cantilevered end of the electrothermal bend actuator 320 bending towards the substrate 301 The lever arm 307 transmits this movement to the nozzle chamber 304 The nozzle chamber 304 moves about two microns to the position shown in Figure 19(b) This increases the ink pressure, forcing ink 321 out of the nozzle 302, and causing the ink meniscus 316 to bulge The nozzle nm 303 prevents the ink meniscus 316 from spreading across the surface of the nozzle chamber 304
As the temperature of the beam pairs 308 and 309 equalizes, the actuator 320 returns to its onginal position This aids in the break-off of the ink droplet 317 from the ink 321 m the nozzle chamber, as shown in Figure 19(c) The nozzle chamber is refilled by the action of the surface tension at the meniscus 316 Figure 20 shows a segment of a pnnthead 350 In a netpage pπnter, the length of the pnnthead is the full width of the paper (typically 210 mm) in the direction 351 The segment shown is 0 4 mm long (about 02% of a complete pnnthead) When pπnting, the paper is moved past the fixed pnnthead in the direction 352 The pnnthead has 6 rows of interdigitated pπnting elements 300, pπnting the six colors or types of ink supplied by the ink inlets 312
To protect the fragile surface of the pnnthead duπng operation, a nozzle guard wafer 330 is attached to the pnnthead substrate 301 For each nozzle 302 there is a coπesponding nozzle guard hole 331 through which the ink droplets are fired To prevent the nozzle guard holes 331 from becoming blocked by paper fibers or other debπs, filtered air is pumped through the air inlets 332 and out of the nozzle guard holes duπng pπnting To prevent ink 321 from drying, the nozzle guard is sealed while the pnnter is idle 1.6 The Netpage Pen The active sensing device of the netpage system is typically a pen 101, which, using its embedded controller
134, is able to capture and decode IR position tags from a page via an image sensor The image sensor is a solid-state device provided with an appropπate filter to permit sensing at only near-infrared wavelengths As descnbed in more detail below, the system is able to sense when the nib is in contact with the surface, and the pen is able to sense tags at a sufficient rate to capture human handwnting (I e at 200 dpi or greater and 100 Hz or faster) Information captured by the pen is encrypted and wirelessly transmitted to the pnnter (or base station), the pnnter or base station inteφreting the data with respect to the (known) page structure
The prefeπed embodiment of the netpage pen operates both as a normal marking ink pen and as a non- marking stylus The marking aspect, however, is not necessary for using the netpage system as a browsing system, such as when it is used as an Internet interface Each netpage pen is registered with the netpage system and has a unique pen ID 61 - 16 -
Figure 23 shows the netpage pen class diagram, reflecting pen-related information maintained by a registration server 11 on the netpage network
When either nib is in contact with a netpage, the pen determines its position and oπentation relative to the page The nib is attached to a force sensor, and the force on the nib is mteφreted relative to a threshold to indicate whether the pen is "up" or "down" This allows a interactive element on the page to be 'clicked' by pressing with the pen mb, in order to request, say, information from a network Furthermore, the force is captured as a continuous value to allow, say, the full dynamics of a signature to be veπfied
The pen determines the position and oπentation of its nib on the netpage by imaging, in the infrared spectrum, an area 193 of the page in the vicinity of the nib It decodes the nearest tag and computes the position of the nib relative to the tag from the observed perspective distortion on the imaged tag and the known geometry of the pen optics Although the position resolution of the tag may be low, because the tag density on the page is inversely proportional to the tag size, the adjusted position resolution is quite high, exceeding the minimum resolution required for accurate handwπting recognition
Pen actions relative to a netpage are captured as a seπes of strokes A stroke consists of a sequence of time- stamped pen positions on the page, initiated by a pen-down event and completed by the subsequent pen-up event A stroke is also tagged with the page ID 50 of the netpage whenever the page ID changes, which, under normal circumstances, is at the commencement of the stroke
Each netpage pen has a cuπent selection 826 associated with it, allowing the user to perform copy and paste operations etc The selection is timestamped to allow the system to discard it after a defined time penod The cuπent selection descπbes a region of a page instance It consists of the most recent digital ink stroke captured through the pen relative to the background area of the page It is inteφreted m an application-specific manner once it is submitted to an application via a selection hyperlink activation
Each pen has a cuπent nib 824 This is the mb last notified by the pen to the system In the case of the default netpage pen descπbed above, either the marking black ink nib or the non-marking stylus nib is cuπent Each pen also has a cuπent nib style 825 This is the nib style last associated with the pen by an application, e g in response to the user selecting a color from a palette The default nib style is the nib style associated with the cuπent nib Strokes captured through a pen are tagged with the current mb style When the strokes are subsequently reproduced, they are reproduced in the nib style with which they are tagged
Whenever the pen is within range of a pπnter with which it can communicate, the pen slowly flashes its "online" LED When the pen fails to decode a stroke relative to the page, it momentanly activates its "eπor" LED When the pen succeeds in decoding a stroke relative to the page, it momentaπly activates its "ok" LED
A sequence of captured strokes is refeπed to as digital ink Digital ink forms the basis for the digital exchange of drawings and handwπting, for online recognition of handwπting, and for online veπfication of signatures
The pen is wireless and transmits digital ink to the netpage pnnter via a short-range radio link The transmitted digital ink is encrypted for pnvacy and secuπty and packetized for efficient transmission, but is always flushed on a pen-up event to ensure timely handling m the pπnter
When the pen is out-of-range of a pnnter it buffers digital ink in internal memory, which has a capacity of over ten minutes of continuous handwπting When the pen is once again with range of a pπnter, it transfers any buffered digital ink A pen can be registered with any number of pnnters, but because all state data resides in netpages both on paper and on the network, it is largely lmmatenal which pπnter a pen is communicating with at any particular time
A prefeπed embodiment of the pen is descπbed in greater detail in Section 6 below, with reference to Figures 8 to 10 - 17 -
1.7 NETPAGE INTERACTION
The netpage pnnter 601 receives data relating to a stroke from the pen 101 when the pen is used to interact with a netpage 1 The coded data 3 of the tags 4 is read by the pen when it is used to execute a movement, such as a stroke The data allows the identity of the particular page and associated interactive element to be determined and an indication of the relative positioning of the pen relative to the page to be obtained The indicating data is transmitted to the pnnter, where it resolves, via the DNS, the page ID 50 of the stroke into the network address of the netpage page server 10 which maintains the coπesponding page instance 830 It then transmits the stroke to the page server If the page was recently identified in an earlier stroke, then the pπnter may already have the address of the relevant page server in its cache Each netpage consists of a compact page layout maintained persistently by a netpage page server (see below) The page layout refers to objects such as images, fonts and pieces of text, typically stored elsewhere on the netpage network
When the page server receives the stroke from the pen, it retπeves the page descπption to which the stroke applies, and determines which element of the page descπption the stroke intersects It is then able to inteφret the stroke in the context of the type of the relevant element
A "click" is a stroke where the distance and time between the pen down position and the subsequent pen up position are both less than some small maximum An object which is activated by a click typically requires a click to be activated, and accordingly, a longer stroke is ignored The failure of a pen action, such as a "sloppy" click, to register is indicated by the lack of response from the pen's "ok" LED
There are two kinds of input elements m a netpage page descπption hyperlinks and form fields Input through a form field can also tπgger the activation of an associated hyperlink 1.7.1 Hyperlinks
A hyperlink is a means of sending a message to a remote application, and typically elicits a pπnted response in the netpage system
A hyperlink element 844 identifies the application 71 which handles activation of the hyperlink, a link ID 54 which identifies the hyperlink to the application, an "alias required" flag which asks the system to mclude the user's application alias ID 65 in the hyperlink activation, and a descπption which is used when the hyperlink is recorded as a favonte or appears in the user's history The hyperlink element class diagram is shown in Figure 29
When a hyperlink is activated, the page server sends a request to an application somewhere on the network The application is identified by an application ID 64, and the application ID is resolved in the normal way via the DNS There are three types of hyperlinks general hyperlinks 863, form hyperlinks 865, and selection hyperlinks 864, as shown m Figure 30 A general hyperlink can implement a request for a linked document, or may simply signal a preference to a server A form hyperlink submits the conespondmg form to the application A selection hyperlink submits the cuπent selection to the application If the cuπent selection contams a single-word piece of text, for example, the application may return a single-page document giving the word's meaning within the context in which it appears, or a translation into a different language Each hyperlink type is characteπzed by what information is submitted to the application The coπesponding hyperlink instance 862 records a transaction ID 55 which can be specific to the page instance on which the hyperlink instance appears The transaction ID can identify user-specific data to the application, for example a "shopping cart" of pending purchases maintained by a purchasing application on behalf of the user
The system includes the pen's cuπent selection 826 in a selection hyperlink activation The system includes the content of the associated form instance 868 m a form hyperlink activation, although if the hyperlink has its "submit delta" attπbute set, only input since the last form submission is included The system includes an effective return path all hyperlink activations
A hyperlmked group 866 is a group element 838 which has an associated hyperlink, as shown in Figure 31 When input occurs through any field element in the group, the hyperlink 844 associated with the group is activated A hyperlmked group can be used to associate hyperlink behavior with a field such as a checkbox It can also be used, in - 18 - conjunction with the "submit delta" attπbute of a form hyperlink, to provide continuous input to an application It can therefore be used to support a "blackboard" interaction model, 1 e where input is captured and therefore shared as soon as it occurs
1.7.2 Forms A form defines a collection of related input fields used to capture a related set of inputs through a pπnted netpage A form allows a user to submit one or more parameters to an application software program running on a server
A form 867 is a group element 838 in the document hierarchy It ultimately contains a set of terminal field elements 839 A form instance 868 represents a pnnted instance of a form It consists of a set of field instances 870 which coπespond to the field elements 845 of the form Each field instance has an associated value 871, whose type depends on the type of the coπesponding field element Each field value records input through a particular pπnted form instance, l e through one or more pnnted netpages The form class diagram is shown in Figure 32
Each form instance has a status 872 which indicates whether the form is active, frozen, submitted, void or expired A form is active when first pnnted A form becomes frozen once it is signed A form becomes submitted once one of its submission hyperlinks has been activated, unless the hyperlink has its "submit delta" attπbute set A form becomes void when the user invokes a void form, reset form or duplicate form page command A form expires when the time the form has been active exceeds the form's specified lifetime While the form is active, form input is allowed Input through a form which is not active is instead captured in the background field 833 of the relevant page instance When the form is active or frozen, form submission is allowed Any attempt to submit a form when the form is not active or frozen is rejected, and instead elicits an form status report Each form instance is associated (at 59) with any form instances denved from it, thus providing a version history This allows all but the latest version of a form in a particular time penod to be excluded from a search
All input is captured as digital ink Digital ink 873 consists of a set of timestamped stroke groups 874, each of which consists of a set of styled strokes 875 Each stroke consists of a set of timestamped pen positions 876, each of which also includes pen oπentation and nib force The digital ink class diagram is shown in Figure 33 A field element 845 can be a checkbox field 877, a text field 878, a drawing field 879, or a signature field
880 The field element class diagram is shown in Figure 34 Any digital ink captured in a field's zone 58 is assigned to the field
A checkbox field has an associated boolean value 881, as shown in Figure 35 Any mark (a tick, a cross, a stroke, a fill zigzag, etc ) captured in a checkbox field's zone causes a true value to be assigned to the field's value A text field has an associated text value 882, as shown in Figure 36 Any digital ink captured in a text field's zone is automatically converted to text via online handwπting recognition, and the text is assigned to the field's value Online handwnting recognition is well-understood see, for example, Tappert, C , C Y Suen and T Wakahara, "The State of the Art in On-Line Handwπting Recognition", IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol 12, No 8, August 1990, the contents of which are herein incoφorated by cross-reference) A signature field has an associated digital signature value 883, as shown Figure 37 Any digital ink captured in a signature field's zone is automatically venfied with respect to the identity of the owner of the pen, and a digital signature of the content of the form of which the field is part is generated and assigned to the field's value The digital signature is generated using the pen user's pnvate signature key specific to the application which owns the form Online signature venfication is well-understood (see, for example, Plamondon, R and G Lorette, "Automatic Signature Veπfication and Wnter Identification - The State of the Art", Pattern Recognition, Vol 22, No 2, 1989, the contents of which are herein incoφorated by cross-reference)
A field element is hidden if its "hidden" attπbute is set A hidden field element does not have an input zone on a page and does not accept input It can have an associated field value which is included in the form data when the form containing the field is submitted - 19 -
"Editing" commands, such as stnke-throughs indicating deletion, can also be recognized in form fields
Because the handwπting recognition algoπthm works "online" (1 e with access to the dynamics of the pen movement), rather than "offline" (I e with access only to a bitmap of pen markings), it can recognize run-on discretely- wntten characters with relatively high accuracy, without a wnter-dependent training phase A wnter-dependent model of handwπting is automatically generated over time, however, and can be generated up-front if necessary,
Digital ink, as already stated, consists of a sequence of strokes Any stroke which starts in a particular element's zone is appended to that element's digital ink stream, ready for inteφretation Any stroke not appended to an object's digital ink stream is appended to the background field's digital ink stream
Digital mk captured m the background field is mteφreted as a selection gesture Circumscnption of one or more objects is generally inteφreted as a selection of the circumscnbed objects, although the actual inteφretation is application-specific
Table 2 summaπses these vanous pen interactions with a netpage
Figure imgf000022_0001
The system maintains a current selection for each pen The selection consists simply of the most recent stroke captured in the background field The selection is cleared after an inactivity timeout to ensure predictable behavior
The raw digital ink captured m every field is retained on the netpage page server and is optionally transmitted with the form data when the form is submitted to the application This allows the application to inteπogate the raw digital ink should it suspect the ongmal conversion, such as the conversion of handwntten text This can, for example, involve human intervention at the application level for forms which fail certain application-specific consistency checks As an extension to this, the entire background area of a form can be designated as a drawing field The application can then decide, on the basis of the presence of digital ink outside the explicit fields of the form, to route the form to a human operator, on the assumption that the user may have indicated amendments to the filled-m fields outside of those fields
Figure 38 shows a flowchart of the process of handling pen input relative to a netpage The process consists of receiving (at 884) a stroke from the pen, identifying (at 885) the page instance 830 to which the page ID 50 in the stroke refers, retπeving (at 886) the page descπption 5, identifying (at 887) a formatted element 839 whose zone 58 the stroke intersects, determining (at 888) whether the formatted element coπesponds to a field element, and if so appending (at 892) the received stroke to the digital mk of the field value 871, inteφreting (at 893) the accumulated digital ink of the field, and determining (at 894) whether the field is part of a hyperlmked group 866 and if so activating (at 895) the associated hyperlink, alternatively determining (at 889) whether the formatted element coπesponds to a hyperlink element and if so activating (at 895) the coπesponding hyperlink, alternatively, in the absence of an input field or hyperlink, - 20 - appending (at 890) the received stroke to the digital ink of the background field 833, and copying (at 891) the received stroke to the current selection 826 of the cuπent pen, as maintained by the registration server
Figure 38a shows a detailed flowchart of step 893 in the process shown in Figure 38, where the accumulated digital ink of a field is inteφreted according to the type of the field The process consists of determining (at 896) whether the field is a checkbox and (at 897) whether the digital ink represents a checkmark, and if so assigning (at 898) a true value to the field value, alternatively determining (at 899) whether the field is a text field and if so converting (at 900) the digital ink to computer text, with the help of the appropπate registration server, and assigning (at 901) the converted computer text to the field value, alternatively determining (at 902) whether the field is a signature field and if so venfymg (at 903) the digital ink as the signature of the pen's owner, with the help of the appropπate registration server, creating (at 904) a digital signature of the contents of the coπesponding form, also with the help of the registration server and using the pen owner's pnvate signature key relating to the conespondmg application, and assigning (at 905) the digital signature to the field value 1.7.3 Page Server Commands
A page server command is a command which is handled locally by the page server It operates directly on form, page and document instances
A page server command 907 can be a void form command 908, a duplicate form command 909, a reset form command 910, a get form status command 911, a duplicate page command 912, a reset page command 913, a get page status command 914, a duplicate document command 915, a reset document command 916, or a get document status command 917, as shown m Figure 39 A void form command voids the coπesponding form instance A duplicate form command voids the coπesponding form instance and then produces an active pnnted copy of the cuπent form instance with field values preserved The copy contains the same hyperlink transaction IDs as the ongmal, and so is indistinguishable from the onginal to an application A reset form command voids the conespondmg form instance and then produces an active pπnted copy of the form instance with field values discarded A get form status command produces a pπnted report on the status of the conespondmg form instance, including who published it, when it was pnnted, for whom it was pπnted, and the form status of the form instance
Since a form hyperlink instance contains a transaction ID, the application has to be involved producing a new form instance A button requesting a new form instance is therefore typically implemented as a hyperlink
A duplicate page command produces a pnnted copy of the conespondmg page instance with the background field value preserved If the page contains a form or is part of a form, then the duplicate page command is inteφreted as a duplicate form command A reset page command produces a pπnted copy of the coπesponding page instance with the background field value discarded If the page contains a form or is part of a form, then the reset page command is inteφreted as a reset form command A get page status command produces a pπnted report on the status of the coπesponding page instance, including who published it, when it was pπnted, for whom it was pπnted, and the status of any forms it contams or is part of
The netpage logo which appears on every netpage is usually associated with a duplicate page element When a page instance is duplicated with field values preserved, field values are pnnted in their native form, l e a checkmark appears as a standard checkmark graphic, and text appears as typeset text Only drawings and signatures appear in their onginal form, with a signature accompanied by a standard graphic indicating successful signature venfication
A duplicate document command produces a pnnted copy of the conespondmg document instance with background field values preserved If the document contains any forms, then the duplicate document command duplicates the forms in the same way a duplicate form command does A reset document command produces a pπnted copy of the coπesponding document instance with background field values discarded If the document contains any forms, then the - 21 - reset document command resets the forms in the same way a reset form command does A get document status command produces a pnnted report on the status of the conespondmg document instance, including who published it, when it was pπnted, for whom it was pπnted, and the status of any forms it contains
If the page server command's "on selected" attnbute is set, then the command operates on the page identified by the pen's cunent selection rather than on the page containing the command This allows a menu of page server commands to be pnnted If the target page doesn't contain a page server command element for the designated page server command, then the command is ignored
An application can provide application-specific handling by embedding the relevant page server command element in a hyperlmked group The page server activates the hyperlink associated with the hyperlmked group rather than executing the page server command
A page server command element is hidden if its "hidden" attπbute is set A hidden command element does not have an input zone on a page and so cannot be activated directly by a user It can, however, be activated via a page server command embedded in a different page, if that page server command has its "on selected" attπbute set
1.8 STANDARD FEATURES OF NETPAGES In the prefeπed form, each netpage is pπnted with the netpage logo at the bottom to indicate that it is a neφage and therefore has interactive properties The logo also acts as a copy button In most cases pressing the logo produces a copy of the page In the case of a form, the button produces a copy of the entire form And in the case of a secure document, such as a ticket or coupon, the button elicits an explanatory note or advertising page
The default single-page copy function is handled directly by the relevant netpage page server Special copy functions are handled by linking the logo button to an application
1.9 USER HELP SYSTEM
In a prefeπed embodiment, the netpage pπnter has a single button labelled "Help" When pressed it elicits a single page of information, including status of pπnter connection • status of pπnter consumables top-level help menu document function menu top-level netpage network directory
The help menu provides a hierarchical manual on how to use the netpage system The document function menu includes the following functions
• pnnt a copy of a document
• pnnt a clean copy of a form
• pπnt the status of a document
A document function is initiated by simply pressing the button and then touching any page of the document The status of a document indicates who published it and when, to whom it was delivered, and to whom and when it was subsequently submitted as a form
The netpage network directory allows the user to navigate the hierarchy of publications and services on the network As an alternative, the user can call the netpage network "900" number "yellow pages" and speak to a human operator The operator can locate the desired document and route it to the user's pπnter Depending on the document type, the publisher or the user pays the small "yellow pages" service fee
The help page is obviously unavailable if the pπnter is unable to pπnt In this case the "eπor" light is lit and the user can request remote diagnosis over the network - 22 -
2 PERSONALIZED PUBLICATION MODEL
In the following descπption, news is used as a canonical publication example to illustrate personalization mechanisms in the netpage system Although news is often used in the limited sense of newspaper and newsmagazine news, the intended scope in the present context is wider In the netpage system the editonal content and the advertising content of a news publication are personalized using different mechamsms The editonal content is personalized according to the reader's explicitly stated and implicitly captured interest profile The advertising content is personalized according to the reader's locality and demographic 2.1 EDITORIAL PERSONALIZATION
A subscnber can draw on two kinds of news sources those that deliver news publications, and those that deliver news streams While news publications are aggregated and edited by the publisher, news streams are aggregated either by a news publisher or by a specialized news aggregator News publications typically conespond to traditional newspapers and newsmagazines, while news streams can be many and vaπed a "raw" news feed from a news service, a cartoon strip, a freelance wnter' s column, a friend's bulletin board, or the reader's own e-mail
The netpage publication server supports the publication of edited news publications as well as the aggregation of multiple news streams By handling the aggregation and hence the formatting of news streams selected directly by the reader, the server is able to place advertising on pages over which it otherwise has no editonal control
The subscnber builds a daily newspaper by selecting one or more contπbuting news publications, and creating a personalized version of each The resulting daily editions are pπnted and bound together into a single newspaper The vanous members of a household typically express their different interests and tastes by selecting different daily publications and then customizing them
For each publication, the reader optionally selects specific sections Some sections appear daily, while others appear weekly The daily sections available from The New York Times online, for example, include "Page One Plus", "National", "International", "Opinion", "Business", "Arts/Living", "Technology", and "Sports" The set of available sections is specific to a publication, as is the default subset The reader can extend the daily newspaper by creating custom sections, each one drawing on any number of news streams Custom sections might be created for e-mail and friends' announcements ("Personal"), or for momtoπng news feeds for specific topics ("Alerts" or "Clippings")
For each section, the reader optionally specifies its size, either qualitatively (e g short, medium, or long), or numeπcally (I e as a limit on its number of pages), and the desired proportion of advertising, either qualitatively (e g high, normal, low, none), or numeπcally (I e as a percentage)
The reader also optionally expresses a preference for a large number of shorter articles or a small number of longer articles Each article is ideally wπtten (or edited) in both short and long forms to support this preference
An article may also be wntten (or edited) in different versions to match the expected sophistication of the reader, for example to provide children's and adults' versions The appropπate version is selected according to the reader's age The reader can specify a "reading age" which takes precedence over their biological age
The articles which make up each section are selected and pπontized by the editors, and each is assigned a useful lifetime By default they are delivered to all relevant subscπbers, in pπonty order, subject to space constraints m the subscπbers' editions
In sections where it is appropπate, the reader may optionally enable collaborative filtenng This is then applied to articles which have a sufficiently long lifetime Each article which qualifies for collaborative filtenng is pπnted with rating buttons at the end of the article The buttons can provide an easy choice (e g "liked" and "disliked'), making it more likely that readers will bother to rate the article
Articles with high pnonties and short lifetimes are therefore effectively considered essential reading by the editors and are delivered to most relevant subscπbers - 23 -
The reader optionally specifies a serendipity factor, either qualitatively (e g do or don't smpnse me), or numeπcally A high serendipity factor lowers the threshold used for matching duπng collaborative filtenng A high factor makes it more likely that the coπesponding section will be filled to the reader's specified capacity A different serendipity factor can be specified for different days of the week The reader also optionally specifies topics of particular interest withm a section, and this modifies the pnonties assigned by the editors
The speed of the reader's Internet connection affects the quality at which images can be delivered The reader optionally specifies a preference for fewer images or smaller images or both If the number or size of images is not reduced, then images may be delivered at lower quality (I e at lower resolution or with greater compression) At a global level, the reader specifies how quantities, dates, times and monetary values are localized This involves specifying whether units are impeπal or metnc, a local timezone and time format, and a local cuπency, and whether the localization consist of in situ translation or annotation These preferences are deπved from the reader's locality by default
To reduce reading difficulties caused by poor eyesight, the reader optionally specifies a global preference for a larger presentation Both text and images are scaled accordingly, and less information is accommodated on each page
The language in which a news publication is published, and its conespondmg text encoding, is a property of the publication and not a preference expressed by the user However, the netpage system can be configured to provide automatic translation services in vanous guises 2.2 ADVERTISING LOCALIZATION AND TARGETING The personalization of the editonal content directly affects the advertising content, because advertising is typically placed to exploit the editonal context Travel ads, for example, are more likely to appear in a travel section than elsewhere The value of the editonal content to an advertiser (and therefore to the publisher) lies m its ability to attract large numbers of readers with the πght demographics
Effective advertising is placed on the basis of locality and demographics Locality determines proximity to particular services, retailers etc , and particular interests and concerns associated with the local community and environment Demographics determine general interests and preoccupations as well as likely spending patterns
A news publisher's most profitable product is advertising "space", a multi-dimensional entity determined by the publication's geographic coverage, the size of its readership, its readership demographics, and the page area available for advertising In the netpage system, the netpage publication server computes the approximate multi-dimensional size of a publication's saleable advertising space on a per-section basis, taking into account the publication's geographic coverage, the section's readership, the size of each reader's section edition, each reader's advertising proportion, and each reader's demographic
In companson with other media, the netpage system allows the advertising space to be defined in greater detail, and allows smaller pieces of it to be sold separately It therefore allows it to be sold at closer to its true value
For example, the same advertising "slot" can be sold varying proportions to several advertisers, with individual readers' pages randomly receiving the advertisement of one advertiser or another, overall preserving the proportion of space sold to each advertiser
The netpage system allows advertising to be linked directly to detailed product information and online purchasing It therefore raises the intπnsic value of the advertising space
Because personalization and localization are handled automatically by netpage publication servers, an advertising aggregator can provide arbitraπly broad coverage of both geography and demographics The subsequent disaggregation is efficient because it is automatic This makes it more cost-effective for publishers to deal with advertising aggregators than to directly capture advertising Even though the advertising aggregator is taking a proportion of - 24 - advertismg revenue, publishers may find the change profit-neutral because of the greater efficiency of aggregation The advertising aggregator acts as an intermediary between advertisers and publishers, and may place the same advertisement m multiple publications
It is worth noting that ad placement m a netpage publication can be more complex than ad placement in the publication's traditional counteφart, because the publication's advertising space is more complex While ignoπng the full complexities of negotiations between advertisers, advertising aggregators and publishers, the prefeπed form of the netpage system provides some automated support for these negotiations, including support for automated auctions of advertising space Automation is particularly desirable for the placement of advertisements which generate small amounts of income, such as small or highly localized advertisements Once placement has been negotiated, the aggregator captures and edits the advertisement and records it on a netpage ad server Coπespondingly, the publisher records the ad placement on the relevant netpage publication server When the netpage publication server lays out each user's personalized publication, it picks the relevant advertisements from the netpage ad server 2.3 USER PROFILES 2.3.1 Information Filtering
The personalization of news and other publications relies on an assortment of user-specific profile information, including
• publication customizations
• collaborative filtenng vectors • contact details
• presentation preferences
The customization of a publication is typically publication-specific, and so the customization information is maintained by the relevant netpage publication server
A collaborative filtenng vector consists of the user's ratings of a number of news items It is used to coπelate different users' interests for the puφoses of making recommendations Although there are benefits to maintaining a single collaborative filtenng vector independently of any particular publication, there are two reasons why it is more practical to maintain a separate vector for each publication there is likely to be more overlap between the vectors of subscπbers to the same publication than between those of subscπbers to different publications, and a publication is likely to want to present its users' collaborative filtenng vectors as part of the value of its brand, not to be found elsewhere Collaborative filtenng vectors are therefore also maintained by the relevant netpage publication server
Contact details, including name, street address, ZIP Code, state, country, telephone numbers, are global by nature, and are maintained by a netpage registration server
Presentation preferences, including those for quantities, dates and times, are likewise global and maintained in the same way The localization of advertising relies on the locality indicated in the user's contact details, while the targeting of advertising relies on personal information such as date of birth, gender, mantal status, income, profession, education, or qualitative deπvatives such as age range and income range
For those users who choose to reveal personal information for advertismg puφoses, the information is maintained by the relevant netpage registration server In the absence of such information, advertismg can be targeted on the basis of the demographic associated with the user's ZIP or ZIP+4 Code
Each user, pen, pnnter, application provider and application is assigned its own unique identifier, and the netpage registration server maintains the relationships between them as shown in Figures 21, 22, 23 and 24 For registration puφoses, a publisher is a special kind of application provider, and a publication is a special kind of application - 25 -
Each user 800 may be authonzed to use any number of pnnters 802, and each pnnter may allow any number of users to use it Each user has a single default pπnter (at 66), to which peπodical publications are delivered by default, whilst pages pπnted on demand are delivered to the pπnter through which the user is interacting The server keeps track of which publishers a user has authoπzed to pπnt to the user's default pπnter A publisher does not record the ID of any particular pπnter, but instead resolves the ID when it is required
When a user subscnbes 808 to a publication 807, the publisher 806 (l e application provider 803) is authonzed to pπnt to a specified pnnter or the user's default pnnter This authonzation can be revoked at any time by the user Each user may have several pens 801, but a pen is specific to a single user If a user is authonzed to use a particular pπnter, then that pπnter recognizes any of the user's pens The pen ID is used to locate the conespondmg user profile maintained by a particular netpage registration server, via the DNS in the usual way
A Web terminal 809 can be authonzed to pnnt on a particular netpage pπnter, allowing Web pages and netpage documents encountered duπng Web browsing to be conveniently pnnted on the nearest netpage pπnter
The netpage system can collect, on behalf of a pπnter provider, fees and commissions on income earned through publications pπnted on the provider's pnnters Such income can include advertising fees, click-through fees, e- commerce commissions, and transaction fees If the pπnter is owned by the user, then the user is the pπnter provider
Each user also has a netpage account 820 which is used to accumulate micro-debits and credits (such as those descπbed in the preceding paragraph), contact details 815, including name, address and telephone numbers, global preferences 816, including pnvacy, delivery and localization settings, any number of biometnc records 817, containing the user's encoded signature 818, fingeφπnt 819 etc, a handwπting model 819 automatically maintained by the system, and SET payment card accounts 821 with which e-commerce payments can be made
2.3.2 Favorites List
A netpage user can maintain a list 922 of "favoπtes" - links to useful documents etc on the netpage network The list is maintained by the system on the user's behalf It is organized as a hierarchy of folders 924, a preferπed embodiment of which is shown in the class diagram in Figure 41
2.3.3 History List
The system maintains a history list 929 on each user's behalf, containing links to documents etc accessed by the user through the netpage system It is organized as a date-ordered list, a prefened embodiment of which is shown in the class diagram in Figure 42 2.4 INTELLIGENT PAGE LAYOUT
The netpage publication server automatically lays out the pages of each user's personalized publication on a section-by-section basis Since most advertisements are in the form of pre-formatted rectangles, they are placed on the page before the editonal content
The advertising ratio for a section can be achieved with wildly varying advertising ratios on individual pages within the section, and the ad layout algoπthm exploits this The algoπthm is configured to attempt to co-locate closely tied editonal and advertising content, such as placing ads for roofing matenal specifically within the publication because of a special feature on do-it-yourself roofing repairs
The editonal content selected for the user, including text and associated images and graphics, is then laid out according to vanous aesthetic rules The entire process, including the selection of ads and the selection of editonal content, must be iterated once the layout has converged, to attempt to more closely achieve the user's stated section size preference The section size preference can, however, be matched on average over time, allowing significant day-to-day vaπations 2.5 DOCUMENT FORMAT
Once the document is laid out, it is encoded for efficient distπbution and persistent storage on the netpage • 26 - network
The pnmary efficiency mechanism is the separation of information specific to a single user's edition and information shared between multiple users' editions The specific information consists of the page layout The shared information consists of the objects to which the page layout refers, including images, graphics, and pieces of text
A text object contains fully-formatted text represented in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) using the Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) XSL provides precise control over text formatting independendy of the region into which the text is being set, which m this case is being provided by the layout The text object contains embedded language codes to enable automatic translation, and embedded hyphenation hints to aid with paragraph formatting
An image object encodes an image in the JPEG 2000 wavelet-based compressed image format A graphic object encodes a 2D graphic in Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) format
The layout itself consists of a seπes of placed image and graphic objects, linked textflow objects through which text objects flow, hyperlinks and input fields as descπbed above, and watermark regions These layout objects are summaπzed Table 3 The layout uses a compact format suitable for efficient distnbution and storage
Table 3. Netpage layout objects
Figure imgf000029_0001
2.6 DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION
As descnbed above, for puφoses of efficient distπbution and persistent storage on the netpage network, a user-specific page layout is separated from the shared objects to which it refers When a subscnbed publication is ready to be distnbuted, the netpage publication server allocates, with the help of the netpage ID server 12, a unique ID for each page, page instance, document, and document instance
The server computes a set of optimized subsets of the shared content and creates a multicast channel for each subset, and then tags each user-specific layout with the names of the multicast channels which will cany the shared content used by that layout The server then pointcasts each user's layouts to that user's pπnter via the appropπate page server, and when the pointcastmg is complete, multicasts the shared content on the specified channels After receiving its pomtcast, each page server and pπnter subscnbes to the multicast channels specified in the page layouts Duπng the multicasts, each page server and pπnter extracts from the multicast streams those objects refened to by its page layouts - 27 -
The page servers persistently archive the received page layouts and shared content
Once a pnnter has received all the objects to which its page layouts refer, the pπnter re-creates the fully- populated layout and then rastenzes and pnnts it
Under normal circumstances, the pπnter pπnts pages faster than they can be delivered Assuming a quarter of each page is covered with images, the average page has a size of less than 400KB The pnnter can therefore hold in excess of 100 such pages in its internal 64MB memory, allowing for temporary buffers etc The pnnter pπnts at a rate of one page per second This is equivalent to 400KB or about 3Mbit of page data per second, which is similar to the highest expected rate of page data delivery over a broadband network
Even under abnormal circumstances, such as when the pnnter runs out of paper, it is likely that the user will be able to replenish the paper supply before the pπnter' s 100-page internal storage capacity is exhausted
However, if the pnnter' s internal memory does fill up, then the pπnter will be unable to make use of a multicast when it first occurs The netpage publication server therefore allows pnnters to submit requests for re-multicasts When a cπtical number of requests is received or a timeout occurs, the server re-multicasts the coπesponding shared objects Once a document is pnnted, a pπnter can produce an exact duplicate at any time by retπeving its page layouts and contents from the relevant page server 2.7 ON-DEMAND DOCUMENTS
When a netpage document is requested on demand, it can be personalized and delivered in much the same way as a peπodical However, since there is no shared content, delivery is made directly to the requesting pπnter without the use of multicast
When a non-netpage document is requested on demand, it is not personalized, and it is delivered via a designated netpage formatting server which reformats it as a netpage document A netpage formatting server is a special instance of a netpage publication server The netpage formatting server has knowledge of vanous Internet document formats, including Adobe's Portable Document Format (PDF), and Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) In the case of HTML, it can make use of the higher resolution of the pπnted page to present Web pages in a multi-column format, with a table of contents It can automatically include all Web pages directly linked to the requested page The user can tune this behavior via a preference
The netpage formatting server makes standard netpage behavior, including interactivity and persistence, available on any Internet document, no matter what its ongin and format It hides knowledge of different document formats from both the netpage pπnter and the netpage page server, and hides knowledge of the netpage system from Web servers
3 SECURITY
3.1 CRYPTOGRAPHY
Cryptography is used to protect sensitive information, both in storage and m transit, and to authenticate parties to a transaction There are two classes of cryptography in widespread use secret-key cryptography and public-key cryptography The netpage network uses both classes of cryptography
Secret-key cryptography, also refeπed to as symmetπc cryptography, uses the same key to encrypt and decrypt a message Two parties wishing to exchange messages must first aπange to securely exchange the secret key
Public-key cryptography, also refeπed to as asymmetnc cryptography, uses two encryption keys The two keys are mathematically related in such a way that any message encrypted using one key can only be decrypted usmg the other key One of these keys is then published, while the other is kept pnvate The public key is used to encrypt any message intended for the holder of the pnvate key Once encrypted using the public key, a message can only be decrypted using the pnvate key Thus two parties can securely exchange messages without first having to exchange a secret key To ensure that the pnvate key is secure, it is normal for the holder of the pnvate key to generate the key pair - 28 -
Pubhc-key cryptography can be used to create a digital signature The holder of the pnvate key can create a known hash of a message and then encrypt the hash using the pnvate key Anyone can then veπfy that the encrypted hash constitutes the "signature" of the holder of the pnvate key with respect to that particular message by decrypting the encrypted hash using the public key and venfying the hash agamst the message If the signature is appended to the message, then the recipient of the message can veπfy both that the message is genuine and that it has not been altered in transit
To make public-key cryptography work, there has to be a way to distπbute public keys which prevents impersonation This is normally done using certificates and certificate authoπties A certificate authonty is a trusted third party which authenticates the connection between a public key and someone's identity The certificate authonty venfies the person's identity by examining identity documents, and then creates and signs a digital certificate containing the person's identity details and public key Anyone who trusts the certificate authonty can use the public key in the certificate with a high degree of certainty that it is genuine They just have to venfy that the certificate has indeed been signed by the certificate authonty, whose public key is well-known
In most transaction environments, public-key cryptography is only used to create digital signatures and to securely exchange secret session keys Secret-key cryptography is used for all other puφoses
In the following discussion, when reference is made to the secure transmission of information between a netpage pπnter and a server, what actually happens is that the pπnter obtains the server's certificate, authenticates it with reference to the certificate authonty, uses the public key-exchange key in the certificate to exchange a secret session key with the server, and then uses the secret session key to encrypt the message data A session key, by definition, can have an arbitiaπly short lifetime
3.2 NETPAGE PRINTER SECURITY
Each netpage pnnter is assigned a pair of unique identifiers at time of manufacture which are stored in readonly memory the pnnter and in the netpage registration server database The first ID 62 is public and umquely identifies the pπnter on the netpage network The second ID is secret and is used when the pπnter is first registered on the network When the pπnter connects to the netpage network for the first time after installation, it creates a signature pubhc/pnvate key pair It transmits the secret ID and the public key securely to the netpage registration server The server compares the secret ID agamst the pπnter' s secret ID recorded in its database, and accepts the registration if the IDs match It then creates and signs a certificate containing the pπnter' s public ID and public signature key, and stores the certificate m the registration database The netpage registration server acts as a certificate authonty for netpage pnnters, since it has access to secret information allowing it to venfy pnnter identity
When a user subscnbes to a publication, a record is created in the netpage registration server database authonzing the publisher to pnnt the publication to the user's default pπnter or a specified pπnter Every document sent to a pnnter via a page server is addressed to a particular user and is signed by the publisher using the publisher's pnvate signature key The page server venfies, via the registration database, that the publisher is authoπzed to deliver the publication to the specified user The page server venfies the signature using the publisher's public key, obtained from the publisher's certificate stored in the registration database
The netpage registration server accepts requests to add pnnting authoπzations to the database, so long as those requests are initiated via a pen registered to the pπnter 3.3 NETPAGE PEN SECURITY
Each netpage pen is assigned a unique identifier at time of manufacture which is stored in read-only memory in the pen and m the netpage registration server database The pen ID 61 uniquely identifies the pen on the netpage network
A netpage pen can "know" a number of netpage pnnters, and a pπnter can "know" a number of pens A pen - 29 - commumcates with a pnnter via a radio frequency signal whenever it is withm range of the pπnter Once a pen and pπnter are registered, they regularly exchange session keys Whenever the pen transmits digital ink to the pnnter, the digital ink is always encrypted using the appropnate session key Digital ink is never transmitted m the clear
A pen stores a session key for every pnnter it knows, indexed by pπnter ID, and a pnnter stores a session key for every pen it knows, indexed by pen ID Both have a large but finite storage capacity for session keys, and will forget a session key on a least-recently-used basis if necessary
When a pen comes within range of a pnnter, the pen and pnnter discover whether they know each other If they don't know each other, then the pπnter determines whether it is supposed to know the pen This might be, for example, because the pen belongs to a user who is registered to use the pπnter If the pnnter is meant to know the pen but doesn't, then it initiates the automatic pen registration procedure If the pπnter isn't meant to know the pen, then it agrees with the pen to ignore it until the pen is placed in a charging cup, at which time it initiates the registration procedure
In addition to its public ID, the pen contains a secret key-exchange key The key-exchange key is also recorded in the netpage registration server database at time of manufacture Dunng registration, the pen transmits its pen ID to the pπnter, and the pπnter transmits the pen ID to the netpage registration server The server generates a session key for the pπnter and pen to use, and securely tiansmits the session key to the pnnter It also transmits a copy of the session key encrypted with the pen's key-exchange key The pπnter stores the session key internally, indexed by the pen ID, and transmits the encrypted session key to the pen The pen stores the session key internally, indexed by the pnnter ID
Although a fake pen can impersonate a pen in the pen registration protocol, only a real pen can decrypt the session key transmitted by the pπnter When a previously unregistered pen is first registered, it is of limited use until it is linked to a user A registered but "un-owned" pen is only allowed to be used to request and fill in netpage user and pen registration forms, to register a new user to which the new pen is automatically linked, or to add a new pen to an existing user
The pen uses secret-key rather than public-key encryption because of hardware performance constraints in the pen 3.4 SECURE DOCUMENTS
The netpage system supports the delivery of secure documents such as tickets and coupons The netpage pπnter includes a facility to pπnt watermarks, but will only do so on request from publishers who are suitably authonzed The publisher indicates its authonty to pπnt watermarks in its certificate, which the pnnter is able to authenticate
The "watermark" pπnting process uses an alternative dither matπx in specified "watermark" regions of the page Back-to-back pages contain minor-image watermark regions which coincide when pnnted The dither matrices used m odd and even pages' watermark regions are designed to produce an interference effect when the regions are viewed together, achieved by looking through the pπnted sheet
The effect is similar to a watermark in that it is not visible when looking at only one side of the page, and is lost when the page is copied by normal means Pages of secure documents cannot be copied using the built-m netpage copy mechanism descπbed in Section
1 9 above This extends to copying netpages on netpage-aware photocopiers
Secure documents are typically generated as part of e-commerce transactions They can therefore include the user's photograph which was captured when the user registered biometnc information with the netpage registration server, as descnbed in Section 2 When presented with a secure netpage document, the recipient can veπfy its authenticity by requesting its status in the usual way The unique ID of a secure document is only valid for the lifetime of the document, and secure document IDs are allocated non-contiguously to prevent their prediction by opportunistic forgers A secure document venfication pen can be developed with built-in feedback on venfication failure, to support easy point-of-presentation document venfication - 30 -
Clearly neither the watermark nor the user's photograph are secure m a cryptographic sense They simply provide a significant obstacle to casual forgery Online document venfication, particularly using a venfication pen, provides an added level of secuπty where it is needed, but is still not entirely immune to forgeπes 3.5 NON-REPUDIATION In the netpage system, forms submitted by users are delivered reliably to forms handlers and are persistently archived on netpage page servers It is therefore impossible for recipients to repudiate delivery
E-commerce payments made through the system, as descπbed in Section 4, are also impossible for the payee to repudiate
4 ELECTRONIC COMMERCE MODEL 4.1 SECURE ELECTRONIC TRANSACTION (SET)
The netpage system uses the Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) system as one of its payment systems SET, having been developed by MasterCard and Visa, is organized around payment cards, and this is reflected in the terminology However, much of the system is independent of the type of accounts being used
In SET, cardholders and merchants register with a certificate authonty and are issued with certificates containing their public signature keys The certificate authonty venfies a cardholder's registration details with the card issuer as appropnate, and venfies a merchant's registration details with the acquirer as appropπate Cardholders and merchants store their respective pnvate signature keys securely on their computers Duπng the payment process, these certificates are used to mutually authenticate a merchant and cardholder, and to authenticate them both to the payment gateway SET has not yet been adopted widely, partly because cardholder maintenance of keys and certificates is considered burdensome Inteπm solutions which maintain cardholder keys and certificates on a server and give the cardholder access via a password have met with some success
4.2 SET PAYMENTS
In the netpage system the netpage registration server acts as a proxy for the netpage user (I e the cardholder) in SET payment transactions
The netpage system uses biometπcs to authenticate the user and authoπze SET payments Because the system is j>en-based, the biometnc used is the user's on-line signature, consisting of time-varying pen position and pressure A fingeφπnt biometnc can also be used by designing a fingeφnnt sensor into the pen, although at a higher cost The type of biometnc used only affects the capture of the biometnc, not the authonzation aspects of the system The first step to bemg able to make SET payments is to register the user's biometnc with the netpage registration server This is done in a controlled environment, for example a bank, where the biometnc can be captured at the same time as the user's identity is veπfied The biometnc is captured and stored in the registration database, linked to the user's record The user's photograph is also optionally captured and linked to the record The SET cardholder registration process is completed, and the resulting pnvate signature key and certificate are stored in the database The user's payment card information is also stored, giving the netpage registration server enough information to act as the user's proxy in any SET payment transaction
When the user eventually supplies the biometnc to complete a payment, for example by signing a netpage order form, the pπnter securely transmits the order information, the pen ID and the biometnc data to the netpage registration server The server venfies the biometnc with respect to the user identified by the pen ID, and from then on acts as the user's proxy in completing the SET payment transaction
4.3 MICRO-PAYMENTS
The netpage system includes a mechanism for micro-payments, to allow the user to be conveniently charged for pπnting low-cost documents on demand and for copying copynght documents, and possibly also to allow the user to be reimbursed for expenses mcuπed in pπnting advertising matenal The latter depends on the level of subsidy already - 31 - provided to the user
When the user registers for e-commerce, a network account is established which aggregates micro-payments The user receives a statement on a regular basis, and can settle any outstanding debit balance using the standard payment mechanism The network account can be extended to aggregate subscnption fees for penodicals, which would also otherwise be presented to the user m the form of individual statements 4.4 TRANSACTIONS
When a user requests a netpage in a particular application context, the application is able to embed a user- specific transaction ID 55 in the page Subsequent input through the page is tagged with the transaction ID, and the application is thereby able to establish an appropπate context for the user's input
When input occurs through a page which is not user-specific, however, the application must use the user's unique identity to establish a context A typical example involves adding items from a pre-pπnted catalog page to the user's virtual "shopping cart" To protect the user's pnvacy, however, the unique user ID 60 known to the netpage system is not divulged to applications This is to prevent different application providers from easily coπelating independently accumulated behavioral data
The netpage registration server instead maintains an anonymous relationship between a user and an application via a unique alias ID 65, as shown in Figure 24 Whenever the user activates a hyperlink tagged with the "registered" attπbute, the netpage page server asks the netpage registration server to translate the associated application ID 64, together with the pen ID 61, into an alias ID 65 The alias ID is then submitted to the hyperlink's application The application maintains state information indexed by alias ID, and is able to retrieve user-specific state information without knowledge of the global identity of the user
The system also maintains an independent certificate and pnvate signature key for each of a user's applications, to allow it to sign application transactions on behalf of the user using only application-specific information To assist the system in routing product bar code (UPC) "hyperlink" activations, the system records a favonte application on behalf of the user for any number of product types
Each application is associated with an application provider, and the system maintains an account on behalf of each application provider, to allow it to credit and debit the provider for click-through fees etc
An application provider can be a publisher of penodical subscnbed content The system records the user's willingness to receive the subscnbed publication, as well as the expected frequency of publication 4.5 RESOURCE DESCRIPTIONS AND COPYRIGHT
A prefeπed embodiment of a resource descπption class diagram is shown in Figure 40 Each document and content object may be descnbed by one or more resource descπptions 842 Resource descπptions use the Dublin Core metadata element set, which is designed to facilitate discovery of electronic resources Dublin Core metadata conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) Resource Descnption Framework (RDF) A resource descπption may identify nghts holders 920 The netpage system automatically transfers copynght fees from users to nghts holders when users pnnt copyπght content 5 COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS
A communications protocol defines an ordered exchange of messages between entities In the netpage system, entities such as pens, pnnters and servers utilise a set of defined protocols to cooperatively handle user interaction with the netpage system
Each protocol is illustrated by way of a sequence diagram in which the honzontal dimension is used to represent message flow and the vertical dimension is used to represent time Each entity is represented by a rectangle containing the name of the entity and a vertical column representing the lifeline of the entity Dunng the time an entity exists, the lifeline is shown as a dashed line Duπng the time an entity is active, the lifeline is shown as a double line - 32 -
Because the protocols considered here do not create or destroy entities, lifelines are generally cut short as soon as an entity ceases to participate m a protocol
5.1 SUBSCRIPTION DELIVERY PROTOCOL
A prefened embodiment of a subscnption delivery protocol is shown in Figure 43 A large number of users may subscnbe to a peπodical publication Each user's edition may be laid out differentiy, but many users' editions will share common content such as text objects and image objects The subscnption delivery protocol therefore delivers document structures to individual pnnters via pomtcast, but delivers shared content objects via multicast
The application (l e publisher) first obtains a document ID 51 for each document from an ID server 12 It then sends each document structure, including its document ID and page descπptions, to the page server 10 responsible for the document's newly allocated ID It includes its own application ID 64, the subscnber's alias ID 65, and the relevant set of multicast channel names It signs the message using its pnvate signature key
The page server uses the application ID and alias ID to obtain from the registration server the conespondmg user ID 60, the user's selected pnnter ID 62 (which may be explicitly selected for the application, or may be the user's default pπnter), and the application's certificate
The application's certificate allows the page server to veπfy the message signature The page server's request to the registration server fails if the application ID and alias ID don't together identify a subscnption 808
The page server then allocates document and page instance IDs and forwards the page descπptions, including page IDs 50, to the pπnter It includes the relevant set of multicast channel names for the pπnter to listen to It then returns the newly allocated page IDs to the application for future reference
Once the application has distπbuted all of the document structures to the subscπbers' selected pnnters via the relevant page servers, it multicasts the vanous subsets of the shared objects on the previously selected multicast channels
Both page servers and pnnters monitor the appropnate multicast channels and receive their required content objects They are then able to populate the previously pomtcast document structures This allows the page servers to add complete documents to their databases, and it allows the pnnters to pπnt the documents
5.2 HYPERLINK ACTIVATION PROTOCOL
A prefeπed embodiment of a hyperlink activation protocol is shown m Figure 45
When a user clicks on a netpage with a netpage pen, the pen communicates the click to the nearest netpage pπnter 601 The click identifies the page and a location on the page The pnnter already knows the ID 61 of the pen from the pen connection protocol
The pnnter determines, via the DNS, the network address of the page server 10a handling the particular page ID 50 The address may already be in its cache if the user has recently interacted with the same page The pnnter then forwards the pen ID, its own pnnter ID 62, the page ID and click location to the page server
The page server loads the page descnption 5 identified by the page ID and determines which input element's zone 58, if any, the click lies in Assuming the relevant input element is a hyperlink element 844, the page server then obtains the associated application ID 64 and link ID 54, and determines, via the DNS, the network address of the application server hosting the application 71
The page server uses the pen ID 61 to obtain the conespondmg user ID 60 from the registration server 11, and then allocates a globally unique hyperlink request ID 52 and builds a hyperlink request 934 The hyperlink request class diagram is shown in Figure 44 The hyperlink request records the IDs of the requesting user and pπnter, and identifies the clicked hyperlink instance 862 The page server then sends its own server ID 53, the hyperlink request ID, and the link ID to the application
The application produces a response document according to application-specific logic, and obtains a document ID 51 from an ID server 12 It then sends the document to the page server 10b responsible for the document's - 33 - newly allocated ID, together with the requesting page server's ID and the hyperlink request ID
The second page server sends the hyperlink request ID and application ID to the first page server to obtain the conespondmg user ID and pnnter ID 62 The first page server rejects the request if the hyperlink request has expired or is for a different application The second page server allocates document instance and page IDs 50, returns the newly allocated page IDs to the application, adds the complete document to its own database, and finally sends the page descnptions to the requesting pnnter.
The hyperlink instance may include a meaningful transaction ID 55, in which case the first page server includes the transaction ID in the message sent to the application This allows the application to establish a transaction- specific context for the hyperlink activation
If the hyperlink requires a user alias, l e its "alias required" attnbute is set, then the first page server sends both the pen ID 61 and the hyperlink's application ID 64 to the registration server 11 to obtain not just the user ID conespond g to the pen ID but also the alias ID 65 coπesponding to the application ID and the user ID It includes the alias ID in the message sent to the application, allowing the application to establish a user-specific context for the hyperlink activation
5.3 HANDWRITING RECOGNITION PROTOCOL
When a user draws a stroke on a netpage with a netpage pen, the pen communicates the stroke to the nearest netpage pπnter The stroke identifies the page and a path on the page
The pπnter forwards the pen ID 61, its own pπnter ID 62, the page ID 50 and stroke path to the page server 10 in the usual way
The page server loads the page descπption 5 identified by the page ID and determines which input element's zone 58, if any, the stroke intersects Assuming the relevant input element is a text field 878, the page server appends the stroke to the text field's digital ink
After a penod of inactivity in the zone of the text field, the page server sends the pen ID and the pending strokes to the registration server 11 for inteφretation The registration server identifies the user conespondmg to the pen, and uses the user's accumulated handwnting model 822 to inteφret the strokes as handwntten text Once it has converted the strokes to text, the registration server returns the text to the requesting page server The page server appends the text to the text value of the text field
5.4 SIGNATURE VERIFICATION PROTOCOL Assuming the input element whose zone the stioke intersects is a signature field 880, the page server 10 appends the stroke to the signature field's digital ink
After a penod of inactivity in the zone of the signature field, the page server sends the pen ID 61 and the pending strokes to the registration server 11 for venfication It also sends the application ID 64 associated with the form of which the signature field is part, as well as the form ID 56 and the cuπent data content of the form The registration server identifies the user conespondmg to the pen, and uses the user's dynamic signature biometnc 818 to venfy the strokes as the user's signature Once it has veπfied the signature, the registration server uses the application ID 64 and user ID 60 to identify the user's application-specific pnvate signature key It then uses the key to generate a digital signature of the form data, and returns the digital signature to the requesting page server The page server assigns the digital signature to the signature field and sets the associated form's status to frozen The digital signature includes the alias ID 65 of the coπesponding user This allows a single form to capture multiple users' signatures
5.5 FORM SUBMISSION PROTOCOL
A prefened embodiment of a form submission protocol is shown in Figure 46
Form submission occurs via a form hyperlink activation It thus follows the protocol defined in Section 5 2, - 34 - with some form-specific additions
In the case of a form hyperlink, the hyperlink activation message sent by the page server 10 to the application 71 also contains the form ID 56 and the cunent data content of the form If the form contains any signature fields, then the application venfies each one by extracting the alias ID 65 associated with the conespondmg digital signature and obtaining the coπesponding certificate from the registration server 11 5.6 COMMISSION PAYMENT PROTOCOL
A prefened embodiment of a commission payment protocol is shown m Figure 47
In an e-commerce environment, fees and commissions may be payable from an application provider to a publisher on click-throughs, transactions and sales Commissions on fees and commissions on commissions may also be payable from the publisher to the provider of the pπnter
The hyperlink request ID 52 is used to route a fee or commission credit from the target application provider 70a (e g merchant) to the source application provider 70b (I e publisher), and from the source application provider 70b to the pnnter provider 72
The target application receives the hyperlink request ID from the page server 10 when the hyperlink is first activated, as descnbed in Section 5 2 When the target application needs to credit the source application provider, it sends the application provider credit to the ongmal page server together with the hyperlink request ID The page server uses the hyperlink request ID to identify the source application, and sends the credit on to the relevant registration server 11 together with the source application ID 64, its own server ID 53, and the hyperlink request ID The registration server credits the coπesponding application provider's account 827 It also notifies the application provider If the application provider needs to credit the pπnter provider, it sends the pπnter provider credit to the ongmal page server together with the hyperlink request ID The page server uses the hyperlink request ID to identify the pnnter, and sends the credit on to the relevant registration server together with the pπnter ID The registration server credits the conespondmg pnnter provider account 814
The source application provider is optionally notified of the identity of the target application provider, and the pnnter provider of the identity of the source application provider 6. NETPAGE PEN DESCRIPTION
6.1 PEN MECHANICS
Referπng to Figures 8 and 9, the pen, generally designated by reference numeral 101, includes a housing 102 in the form of a plastics moulding having walls 103 defining an inteπor space 104 for mounting the pen components The pen top 105 is in operation rotatably mounted at one end 106 of the housing 102 A semi-transparent cover 107 is secured to the opposite end 108 of the housing 102 The cover 107 is also of moulded plastics, and is formed from semi- transparent matenal in order to enable the user to view the status of the LED mounted withm the housing 102 The cover 107 includes a main part 109 which substantially sunounds the end 108 of the housing 102 and a projecting portion 110 which projects back from the mam part 109 and fits within a conespondmg slot 111 formed in the walls 103 of the housmg 102 A radio antenna 112 is mounted behind the projecting portion 110, within the housing 102 Screw threads 113 sunounding an aperture 113A on the cover 107 are aπanged to receive a metal end piece 114, including conespondmg screw threads 115 The metal end piece 114 is removable to enable ink cartπdge replacement
Also mounted with the cover 107 is a tn-color status LED 116 on a flex PCB 117 The antenna 112 is also mounted on the flex PCB 117 The status LED 116 is mounted at the top of the pen 101 for good all-around visibility The pen can operate both as a normal marking ink pen and as a non-mark g stylus An mk pen cartπdge 118 with nib 119 and a stylus 120 with stylus mb 121 are mounted side by side within the housing 102 Either the ink cartπdge nib 119 or the stylus nib 121 can be brought forward through open end 122 of the metal end piece 114, by rotation of the pen top 105 Respective slider blocks 123 and 124 are mounted to the mk cartπdge 118 and stylus 120, respectively A rotatable cam baπel 125 is secured to the pen top 105 in operation and aπanged to rotate therewith The - 35 - cam baπel 125 includes a cam 126 in the form of a slot within the walls 181 of the cam baπel Cam followers 127 and 128 projecting from slider blocks 123 and 124 fit with the cam slot 126 On rotation of the cam baπel 125, the slider blocks 123 or 124 move relative to each other to project either the pen mb 119 or stylus mb 121 out through the hole 122 in the metal end piece 114 The pen 101 has three states of operation By turning the top 105 through 90° steps, the three states are
Stylus 120 nib 121 out,
• Ink cartndge 118 mb 119 out, and
• Neither ink cartndge 118 nib 119 out nor stylus 120 nib 121 out
A second flex PCB 129, is mounted on an electronics chassis 130 which sits within the housing 102 The second flex PCB 129 mounts an infrared LED 131 for providing infrared radiation for projection onto the surface An image sensor 132 is provided mounted on the second flex PCB 129 for receiving reflected radiation from the surface The second flex PCB 129 also mounts a radio frequency chip 133, which includes an RF transmitter and RF receiver, and a controller chip 134 for controlling operation of the pen 101 An optics block 135 (formed from moulded clear plastics) sits withm the cover 107 and projects an infrared beam onto the surface and receives images onto the image sensor 132 Power supply wires 136 connect the components on the second flex PCB 129 to battery contacts 137 which are mounted within the cam baπel 125 A terminal 138 connects to the battery contacts 137 and the cam baπel 125 A three volt rechargeable battery 139 sits within the cam baπel 125 in contact with the battery contacts An induction charging coil 140 is mounted about the second flex PCB 129 to enable recharging of the battery 139 via induction The second flex PCB 129 also mounts an infrared LED 143 and infrared photodiode 144 for detecting displacement in the cam baπel 125 when either the stylus 120 or the ink cartndge 118 is used for writing, in order to enable a determination of the force being applied to the surface by the pen nib 119 or stylus nib 121 The IR photodiode 144 detects light from the IR LED 143 via reflectors (not shown) mounted on the slider blocks 123 and 124
Rubber gπp pads 141 and 142 are provided towards the end 108 of the housing 102 to assist gnppmg the pen 101, and top 105 also includes a clip 142 for clipping the pen 101 to a pocket 6.2 PEN CONTROLLER
The pen 101 is ananged to determine the position of its nib (stylus mb 121 or ink cartπdge nib 119) by imaging, m the infrared spectrum, an area of the surface m the vicinity of the nib It records the location data from the nearest location tag, and is ananged to calculate the distance of the nib 121 or 119 from the location tab utilising optics 135 and controller chip 134 The controller chip 134 calculates the oπentation of the pen and the nib-to-tag distance from the perspective distortion observed on the imaged tag
Utilising the RF chip 133 and antenna 112 the pen 101 can transmit the digital ink data (which is encrypted for secunty and packaged for efficient transmission) to the computing system
When the pen is in range of a receiver, the digital ink data is transmitted as it is formed When the pen 101 moves out of range, digital ink data is buffered within the pen 101 (the pen 101 circuitry includes a buffer ananged to store digital ink data for approximately 12 minutes of the pen motion on the surface) and can be transmitted later
The controller chip 134 is mounted on the second flex PCB 129 in the pen 101 Figure 10 is a block diagram illustrating m more detail the architecture of the controller chip 134 Figure 10 also shows representations of the RF chip 133, the image sensor 132, the tπ-color status LED 116, the IR illumination LED 131, the IR force sensor LED 143, and the force sensor photodiode 144 The pen controller chip 134 includes a controlling processor 145 Bus 146 enables the exchange of data between components of the controller chip 134 Flash memory 147 and a 512 KB DRAM 148 are also included An analog-to-digital converter 149 is ananged to convert the analog signal from the force sensor photodiode 144 to a digital signal
An image sensor interface 152 interfaces with the image sensor 132 A transceiver controller 153 and base - 36 - band circuit 154 are also included to interface with the RF chip 133 which includes an RF circuit 155 and RF resonators and inductors 156 connected to the antenna 112
The controlling processor 145 captures and decodes location data from tags from the surface via the image sensor 132, monitors the force sensor photodiode 144, controls the LEDs 116, 131 and 143, and handles short-range radio communication via the radio transceiver 153 It is a medium-performance (~40MHz) general-pmpose RISC processor
The processor 145, digital transceiver components (transceiver controller 153 and baseband circuit 154), image sensor interface 152, flash memory 147 and 512KB DRAM 148 are integrated in a single controller ASIC Analog RF components (RF circuit 155 and RF resonators and inductors 156) are provided in the separate RF chip
The image sensor is a 215x215 pixel CCD (such a sensor is produced by Matsushita Electronic Coφoration, and is descπbed m a paper by Itakura, K T Nobusada, N Okusenya, R Nagayoshi, and M Ozaki, "A 1mm 50k-Pιxel IT CCD Image Sensor for Miniature Camera System", IEEE Transactions on Electronic Devices, Volt 47, number 1, January 2000, which is incoφorated herein by reference) with an IR filter
The controller ASIC 134 enters a quiescent state after a penod of inactivity when the pen 101 is not in contact with a surface It incoφorates a dedicated circuit 150 which monitors the force sensor photodiode 144 and wakes up the controller 134 via the power manager 151 on a pen-down event
The radio transceiver communicates in the unlicensed 900MHz band normally used by cordless telephones, or alternatively in the unlicensed 2 4GHz industnal, scientific and medical (ISM) band, and uses frequency hopping and collision detection to provide interference-free communication
In an alternative embodiment, the pen incoφorates an Infrared Data Association (IrDA) interface for short- range communication with a base station or netpage pπnter
In a further embodiment, the pen 101 includes a pair of orthogonal accelerometers mounted in the normal plane of the pen 101 axis The accelerometers 190 are shown in Figures 9 and 10 in ghost outline
The provision of the accelerometers enables this embodiment of the pen 101 to sense motion without reference to surface location tags, allowing the location tags to be sampled at a lower rate Each location tag ID can then identify an object of interest rather than a position on the surface For example, if the object is a user interface input element (e g a command button), then the tag ID of each location tag within the area of the input element can directly identify the input element
The acceleration measured by the accelerometers m each of the x and y directions is integrated with respect to time to produce an instantaneous velocity and position Since the starting position of the stroke is not known, only relative positions within a stroke are calculated
Although position integration accumulates eπors in the sensed acceleration, accelerometers typically have high resolution, and the time duration of a stroke, over which eπors accumulate, is short 7. NETPAGE PRINTER DESCRIPTION
7.1 PRINTER MECHANICS The vertically-mounted netpage wallpnnter 601 is shown fully assembled in Figure 11 It pnnts netpages on
Letter/ A4 sized media using duplexed &Vz" Memjet™ pπnt engines 602 and 603, as shown m Figures 12 and 12a It uses a straight paper path with the paper 604 passing through the duplexed pπnt engines 602 and 603 which pπnt both sides of a sheet simultaneously, in full color and with full bleed
An integral binding assembly 605 applies a stπp of glue along one edge of each pnnted sheet, allowing it to adhere to the previous sheet when pressed agamst it This creates a final bound document 618 which can range in thickness from one sheet to several hundred sheets
The replaceable ink cartndge 627, shown in Figure 13 coupled with the duplexed pπnt engines, has bladders or chambers for stoπng fixative, adhesive, and cyan, magenta, yellow, black and infrared inks The cartndge also contains a micro air filter in a base molding The micro air filter interfaces with an air pump 638 inside the pπnter via a hose 639 - 37 -
This provides filtered air to the pnntheads to prevent ingress of micro particles into the Memjet™ pnntheads 350 which might otherwise clog the pnnthead nozzles By mcoφorating the air filter withm the cartridge, the operational life of the filter is effectively linked to the life of the cartndge The ink cartndge is a fully recyclable product with a capacity for pnnting and gluing 3000 pages (1500 sheets) Refernng to Figure 12, the motonzed media pick-up roller assembly 626 pushes the top sheet directly from the media tray past a paper sensor on the first pπnt engine 602 into the duplexed Memjet™ pnnthead assembly The two Memjet™ pπnt engines 602 and 603 are mounted m an opposing in-line sequential configuration along the straight paper path The paper 604 is drawn into the first pπnt engine 602 by integral, powered pick-up rollers 626 The position and size of the paper 604 is sensed and full bleed pnnting commences Fixative is pπnted simultaneously to aid drying in the shortest possible time
The paper exits the first Memjet™ pπnt engine 602 through a set of powered exit spike wheels (aligned along the straight paper path), which act against a rubbeπzed roller These spike wheels contact the 'wet' pπnted surface and continue to feed the sheet 604 mto the second Memjet™ pπnt engine 603
Refernng to Figures 12 and 12a, the paper 604 passes from the duplexed pnnt engines 602 and 603 into the binder assembly 605 The pnnted page passes between a powered spike wheel axle 670 with a fibrous support roller and another movable axle with spike wheels and a momentary action glue wheel The movable axle/glue assembly 673 is mounted to a metal support bracket and it is transported forward to interface with the powered axle 670 via gears by action of a camshaft A separate motor powers this camshaft
The glue wheel assembly 673 consists of a partially hollow axle 679 with a rotating coupling for the glue supply hose 641 from the ink cartndge 627 This axle 679 connects to a glue wheel, which absorbs adhesive by capillary action through radial holes A molded housing 682 suπounds the glue wheel, with an opening at the front Pivoting side moldings and sprung outer doors are attached to the metal bracket and hinge out sideways when the rest of the assembly 673 is thrust forward This action exposes the glue wheel through the front of the molded housing 682 Tension spπngs close the assembly and effectively cap the glue wheel dunng peπods of inactivity As the sheet 604 passes into the glue wheel assembly 673, adhesive is applied to one vertical edge on the front side (apart from the first sheet of a document) as it is transported down into the binding assembly 605 7.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE
The netpage pπnter controller consists of a controlling processor 750, a factory-installed or field-installed network interface module 625, a radio transceiver (transceiver controller 753, baseband circuit 754, RF circuit 755, and RF resonators and inductors 756), dual raster image processor (RIP) DSPs 757, duplexed pnnt engine controllers 760a and 760b, flash memory 658, and 64MB of DRAM 657, as illustrated in Figure 14
The controlling processor handles communication with the network 19 and with local wireless netpage pens 101, senses the help button 617, controls the user interface LEDs 613-616, and feeds and synchronizes the RIP DSPs 757 and pnnt engine contiollers 760 It consists of a medium-performance general-puφose microprocessor The controlling processor 750 communicates with the pnnt engine controllers 760 via a high-speed seπal bus 659
The RIP DSPs rasteπze and compress page descnptions to the netpage pπnter' s compressed page format Each pπnt engine controller expands, dithers and pπnts page images to its associated Memjet™ pnnthead 350 in real time (l e at over 30 pages per minute) The duplexed pπnt engine controllers pπnt both sides of a sheet simultaneously
The master pπnt engine controller 760a controls the paper transport and monitors ink usage in conjunction with the master QA chip 665 and the ink cartπdge QA chip 761
The pπnter controller's flash memory 658 holds the software for both the processor 750 and the DSPs 757, as well as configuration data This is copied to main memory 657 at boot time
The processor 750, DSPs 757, and digital transceiver components (transceiver controller 753 and baseband - 38 - circuit 754) are integrated in a single controller ASIC 656 Analog RF components (RF circuit 755 and RF resonators and inductors 756) are provided in a separate RF chip 762 The network interface module 625 is separate, since netpage pnnters allow the network connection to be factory-selected or field-selected Flash memory 658 and the 2x256Mbit (64MB) DRAM 657 is also off-chip The pπnt engine controllers 760 are provided in separate ASICs A vaπety of network interface modules 625 are provided, each providing a netpage network interface 751 and optionally a local computer or network interface 752 Netpage network Internet interfaces include POTS modems, Hybπd Fiber-Coax (HFC) cable modems, ISDN modems, DSL modems, satellite transceivers, cuπent and next-generation cellular telephone transceivers, and wireless local loop (WLL) transceivers Local interfaces include IEEE 1284 (parallel port), lOBase-T and 100Base-T Ethernet, USB and USB 20, IEEE 1394 (Firewire), and vanous emerging home networking interfaces If an Internet connection is available on the local network, then the local network interface can be used as the netpage network interface
The radio transceiver 753 communicates in the unlicensed 900MHz band normally used by cordless telephones, or alternatively m the unlicensed 24GHz industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) band, and uses frequency hopping and collision detection to provide interference-free communication The pnnter controller optionally incoφorates an Infrared Data Association (IrDA) mterface for receivmg data
"squirted" from devices such as netpage cameras In an alternative embodiment, the pπnter uses the IrDA interface for short-range communication with suitably configured netpage pens
7.2.1 RASTERIZATION AND PRINTING
Once the main processor 750 has received and veπfied the document's page layouts and page objects, it runs the appropnate RIP software on the DSPs 757
The DSPs 757 rasteπze each page descπption and compress the rastenzed page image The main processor stores each compressed page image in memory The simplest way to load-balance multiple DSPs is to let each DSP rastenze a separate page The DSPs can always be kept busy since an arbitrary number of rasteπzed pages can, in general, be stored in memory This strategy only leads to potentially poor DSP utilization when rasteπzing short documents Watermark regions in the page descπption are rasteπzed to a contone-resolution bi-level bitmap which is losslessly compressed to negligible size and which forms part of the compressed page image
The infrared (IR) layer of the pπnted page contains coded netpage tags at a density of about six per inch Each tag encodes the page ID, tag ID, and control bits, and the data content of each tag is generated duπng rastenzation and stored in the compressed page image The mam processor 750 passes back-to-back page images to the duplexed pπnt engine controllers 760 Each pπnt engine controller 760 stores the compressed page image in its local memory, and starts the page expansion and pπnting pipeline Page expansion and pπnting is pipelined because it is impractical to store an entire 114MB bi-level CMYK+IR page image in memory
7.2.2 PRINT ENGINE CONTROLLER The page expansion and pπnting pipeline of the pnnt engine controller 760 consists of a high speed IEEE
1394 seπal interface 659, a standard JPEG decoder 763, a standard Group 4 Fax decoder 764, a custom halftoner/compositor unit 765, a custom tag encoder 766, a line loader/formatter unit 767, and a custom interface 768 to the Memjet™ pnnthead 350
The pπnt engine controller 360 operates in a double buffered manner While one page is loaded into DRAM 769 via the high speed senal interface 659, the previously loaded page is read from DRAM 769 and passed through the pπnt engine controller pipeline Once the page has finished pπnting, the page just loaded is pπnted while another page is loaded
The first stage of the pipeline expands (at 763) the JPEG-compressed contone CMYK layer, expands (at 764) - 39 - the Group 4 Fax-compressed bi-level black layer, and renders (at 766) the bi-level netpage tag layer according to the tag format defined in section 1 2, all in parallel The second stage dithers (at 765) the contone CMYK layer and composites (at 765) the bi-level black layer over the resulting bi-level CMYK layer The resultant bi-level CMYK+IR dot data is buffered and formatted (at 767) for pnnting on the Memjet™ pnnthead 350 via a set of line buffers Most of these line buffers are stored in the off-chip DRAM The final stage pπnts the six channels of bi-level dot data (including fixative) to the Memjet™ pnnthead 350 via the pnnthead interface 768
When several pπnt engine controllers 760 are used in unison, such as in a duplexed configuration, they are synchronized via a shared line sync signal 770 Only one pπnt engine 760, selected via the external master/slave pin 771, generates the line sync signal 770 onto the shared line The pπnt engine controller 760 contains a low-speed processor 772 for synchronizing the page expansion and rendeπng pipeline, configuπng the pnnthead 350 via a low-speed seπal bus 773, and controlling the stepper motors 675, 676
In the 8'/2" versions of the netpage pπnter, the two pπnt engines each pπnts 30 Letter pages per minute along the long dimension of the page (11"), giving a line rate of 8 8 kHz at 1600 dpi In the 12" versions of the netpage pπnter, the two pnnt engines each pπnts 45 Letter pages per minute along the short dimension of the page (SlΔ"), giving a line rate of 102 kHz These lme rates are well withm the operating frequency of the Memjet™ pnnthead, which in the cuπent design exceeds 30 kHz 8 NETPAGE TAGS
8.1 TAG TILING 8.1.1 Planar Surface Tag Tiling
In order to support "single-click" interaction with a tagged region via a sensing device, the sensing device must be able to see at least one entire tag 4 in its field of view no matter where m the region or at what oπentation it is positioned The required diameter of the field of view of the sensing device is therefore a function of the size and spacing of the tags 4 In the case where the tag shape is circular, such as the prefeπed tag 4 descπbed earlier, the minimum diameter m of the sensor field of view is obtained when the tags 500, of diameter k, are tiled on an equilateral tπangular gnd, as shown in Figure 52 and defined in EQ 1 This is achieved when the center-to-center tag spacing is the same as the tag diameter k
With a tag diameter k of 256 dots (-4 mm at 1600 dpi), m is therefore 552 dots (-8 8 mm) With a quiet area of 16 dots, l e an effective tag diameter k of 272 dots (-43 mm), m increases to 587 dots (-9 3 mm)
When the tags 4 are moved a distance 5 apart, where s is at least as large as k, then the minimum field of view is given by EQ 2
When no overlap is desired in the honzontal direction between successive lines of tags 500, for example to make tag rendenng easier, the tags must be moved apart by a minimum amount given by EQ 3. For a 256-dot diameter tag, u is therefore 40 dots (-06 mm at 1600 dpi) Since this exceeds the quiet area required for the tag, the quiet area can be ignored if tag lines are rendered to not overlap
Setting s = k + u EQ 2 gives EQ 4. For a 256-dot diameter tag, 5 is therefore 296 dots (~47 mm at 1600 dpi), and m is 598 dots (-9 5 mm) 8.1.2 Spherical Surface Tag Tiling A regular icosahedron is often used as the basis for generating an almost regular tπangular tiling of a sphere
A regular icosahedron, such as icosahedron 526 in Figure 53, is composed of twenty equal-sized equilateral tπangular faces 528 shanng thirty edges 530 and twelve vertices 532, with five of the edges 530 meeting at each of the vertices 532 To achieve the required tiling, the icosahedron 526 is mscnbed in a target sphere, and each tπangle 528 of - 40 - the icosahedron 526 is subdivided into an equal number of equal-sized equilateral subdivision tnangles to yield the desired total number of tnangles If each edge 530 of the icosahedron is divided into v equal intervals, defining a set of v— 1 points along each edge, and each pair of coπesponding points along any two adjacent edges is joined by a line parallel to the other shared adjacent edge, the lines so drawn intersect at the vertices of the desired equal-sized and equilateral subdivision tnangles, resulting m the creation of v2 tnangles per tπangular face 528 of the icosahedron 526, or 20V2 tnangles in all Of the resulting 10v2 + 2 vertices, five tπangular faces meet at each of the twelve ongmal vertices of the icosahedron 526, and six triangular faces meet at the each of the remaining vertices The twelve onginal vertices 532 already he on the sphere, while the remaining vertices he inside the sphere Each created vertex is therefore centrally projected onto the sphere, giving the desired tiling A sphere approximated by a regular polyhedron in this way is refeπed to as a geodesic, and the parameter v is refened to as the frequency of the geodesic Figure 54 shows an icosahedral geodesic 534 with v=3, I e with 180 faces 528
The closer a subdivision tnangle is to the center of a face of the icosahedron 526, the further it is from the surface of the sphere, and hence the larger it is when projected onto the sphere To minimise vanation in the size of projected subdivision tnangles, subdivison vertices can systematically be displaced pπor to projection (Tegmark, M , "An Icosahedron-Based Method for Pixehzing the Celestial Sphere", ApJ Letters, 470, L81, October 14, 1996) If v = 1 then no vertices are created and the angle subtended by a triangular face at a vertex remains 60° As v increases, however, the surface defined by the five tπangular faces sunoundmg each onginal vertex becomes increasingly flat, and the vertex angle of each tπangular face converges on 72° (I e 360° / 5) This defines the worst case for a tag tiling of a sphere In a 72° isosceles tnangle the base length is 1 18 times the length of the two sides The maximum tag spacing 5 for the purposes of calculating the sensor field of view is therefore close to 1 18A With a tag diameter of 256 dots and a quiet area of 16 dots, l e an effective tag diameter k of 272 dots (-43 mm), m is therefore 643 dots (-102 mm) according to EQ 2
The angle subtended by each edge of an icosahedron at the center of the circumscnbing sphere is given by EQ 5
For a sphere of radius r the arc length of each centrally projected edge is rθ Given a tag diameter of K in the same units as r, the number of tags n required to cover the sphere is given by EQ 6. For a given n, r is limited by EQ 7. If n is limited to 216, to allow the use of a 16-bit tag ID without requinng multiple regions to cover the sphere, and K is taken to be 43 mm as above, then r is limited to -310 mm
A typical globe has a radius of 160 mm Its projected arc length of -177 mm fits 41 evenly spaced tags with negligible additional spacing Such a globe uses 16812 tags in total 8.1.3 Arbitrary Curved Surface Tag Tiling
A tnangle mesh can approximate a surface of arbitrary topography and topology without introducing discontinuities or smgulanties, with the local scale of the mesh being dictated by the local curvature of the surface and an enor bound Assuming the existence of a tπangle mesh for a particular surface, an effective non-regular tiling of tags can be produced as long as each mesh tπangle respects a minimum vertex angle and a minimum edge length A tiling is considered effective with respect to a particular sensing device if the field of view of the sensing device is guaranteed to include at least one complete tag at any position of the sensing device on the surface The tiling procedure starts by placing a tag at each vertex of the mesh, so the minimum edge length is the same as the tag diameter k The tiling procedure proceeds by inserting a tag at the midpoint of any edge whose length exceeds a maximum tag separation s As illustrated in Figure 9, the maximum tag spacing 5 is calculated so that if two adjacent tags 4a and 4b are a distance s + ε apart, then there is room for another tag 4c between them, l e EQ 8 - 41
However, if the vertex angle between two edges of length s + ε is less than 60°, then the inserted tags will overlap.
To prevent inserted tags from overlapping, a minimum tag separation / is introduced, where t ≥ k. The minimum vertex angle then becomes a function of k and /, as shown in EQ 9. Clearly, when t = k, β is constrained to be 60°, i.e. the mesh is constrained to be equilateral. But as illustrated in Figure 56, when t > k, β can be less than 60° without inserted tags overlapping.
The maximum tag separation s must be based on the new minimum tag separation t, in accordance with EQ 10.
When considering a particular mesh triangle, there are four distinct tag insertion scenarios. By assuming that the minimum vertex angle is no less than 30° (i.e. half of 60°), it can be shown that whenever a mesh triangle has at least one edge less than or equal to s in length, the remaining two edges are less than 2s in length. In practice the minimum vertex angle is typically at least 45°.
In the first scenario (Figure 57) no edges of a triangle 546 exceed s in length, so the tagging of the triangle is already complete. In the second scenario (Figure 58) one edge 548 of a triangle 550 exceeds _; in length. A tag 552 is inserted at the midpoint of the edge 548 to complete the tagging of the triangle 550.
In the third scenario (Figure 59) two edges 554, 556 of a triangle 558 exceed s in length. Tags 560, 562 are inserted at the midpoint of each of the two long edges 554, 556 and this may complete the tagging of the triangle 558.
Centers of the two inserted tags 560, 562 together with the two vertices 564, 566 of the short edge 568 of the original triangle 558 form a ttapezoid. If either diagonal of the tiapezoid exceeds s in length then a final tag 570 is inserted at the center of the ttapezoid to complete the tagging of the triangle.
In the fourth scenario (Figure 60) all three edges 572 of a triangle 573 exceed s in length. A tagged vertex 574 is inserted at the midpoint of each edge 572 and the three new vertices 574 are joined by edges 576. The tagging procedure is then recursively applied to each of the four resultant triangles 577, 578, 579 and 580. Note that the new triangles respect the minimum vertex angle because they have the same shape as the original triangle 573. The tag tiling variables are summarized in Table 4. Table 4. Tag tiling variables
Figure imgf000044_0001
8.2 TAG SENSING
8.2.1 Pen Orientation
To allow a pen-like sensing device to be used as a comfortable writing instrument, a range of pen orientations must be supported. Since the pen nib is constrained to be in contact with the surface, the orientation of the pen can be characterized by the yaw (z rotation), pitch (x rotation) and roll (y rotation) of the pen, as illustrated in Figure 61. While the yaw of the pen must be unconstrained, it is reasonable to constiain the pitch and roll of the pen as well as the overall tilt of the pen resulting from the combination of pitch and roll.
Yaw is conventionally applied after pitch, such that, for example, in the case of a pen device it would define a - 42 - twist about the physical axis rather than a direction in the surface plane In a pen with a marking nib, however, the image sensor is mounted off the axis of the pen and the pen's image sensing ability (and hence its yaw sensing ability) is therefore constrained unless the pen is held almost vertically, as discussed below Yaw is therefore applied before pitch, allowing the full yaw range to be specified by rotating the pen relative to the surface while keeping pitch and roll constant Pitch and roll are conventionally defined as y and x rotations, respectively Here they are defined as x and y rotations, respectively, because they are defined with respect to the x-y coordinate system of the surface, where the y axis is the natural longitudinal axis and the x axis is the natural lateral axis when viewed by a user In a πght-handed 3D coordinate system, roll is conventionally defined as positive when anticlockwise, while pitch and yaw are conventionally defined as positive when clockwise Here all rotations are defined as positive when anticlockwise The pen's overall tilt (0) is related to its pitch (φ) and the roll (ψ) in accordance with EQ 11.
The pen's tilt affects the scale at which surface features are imaged at different points m the field of view, and therefore affects the resolution of the image sensor Since it is impractical to sense the area directly under the pen mb, the pen's tilt also affects the distance from the mb to the center of the imaged area This distance must be known to allow a precise mb position to be denved from the position determined from the tag 8.2.2 Image Sensing
The field of view can be modeled as a cone defined by a solid half-angle α (giving an angular field of view of 2α), and an apex height of D above the surface when the optical axis is vertical Although the image sensor is typically rectangular, only the largest elliptical subarea of the image sensor is relevant to guaranteeing that a sufficiently large part of the surface is imaged, as quantified earlier The intersection of the field of view cone with the surface defines an elliptical window on the surface This window is circular when the optical axis is vertical
Figure 62 illustrates the geometnc relationship, for a given pitch-related tilt θ of the pen's optical axis, between the pen's nib (point A), the pen's optical axis (CE), and the field of view window (FH) The tilt is defined to be clockwise positive from the vertical The equations which follow apply to both positive and negative tilt When the pen is not tilted, the window diameter (I e | BD | ) is given by EQ 12.
If, when the pen is not tilted, the distance from the nib to edge of the window (ι e | AB | ) is T, then the distance S from the nib to the center of the window (I e | AC | ) is given by EQ 13.
When the pen is tilted by θ, the distance from the viewpoint to the surface along the optical axis is reduced to d (l e I GE I ), given by EQ 14. The width of the window (I e | FH | ) is then given by EQ 15.
__> and must be chosen so that an adequately large area is imaged throughout the supported tilt range The required minimum diameter m of the area is given by EQ 4, while the width of the actual imaged area is given by EQ 15 This then gives EQ 16.
Once D and α are determined, an image sensor resolution must be chosen so that the imaged area is adequately sampled, I e that the maximum feature frequency is sampled at its Nyquist rate or higher
When imaged, the scale of the surface decreases with increasing distance from the viewpoint and with increasing inclination relative to the viewing ray Both factors have maximum effect at point F for positive tilt and point H for negative tilt, I e at the point in the window furthest from the viewpoint Note that references to F in the following discussion apply to H when the tilt is negative The distance of point F from the viewpoint (I e | EF | ) is given by EQ 17.
Scaling due to the inclination of the surface relative to the viewing ray through F (EF) is given by EQ 18.
If the surface feature frequency is/, then the angular surface feature frequency ω at F (I e with respect to the field of view) due to both factors is given by EQ 19. - 43 -
When there is no object plane tilt (1 e 0 = 0), this reduces to EQ 20.
The image sensor is, by definition, required to image at least the entire angular field of view Since the pixel density of the image sensor is uniform, it must image the entire field of view at maximum frequency Given an angular field of view in image space of 2α', an image sensor tilt (l e image plane tilt) with respect to the optical axis of θ', and a sampling rate of n (where n ≥ 2 according to Nyquist's theorem), the minimum image sensor resolution q is given by EQ
21 and EQ 22.
The cos-squared term in the numerator in EQ 22 results from the same reasoning as the cos-squared term in the denominator m EQ 19
When there is no image plane tilt (l e θ' = 0), and the image space and object space angular fields of view are equal (l e α' = α), this reduces to EQ 23 and EQ 24.
When there is no object plane tilt (l e 0 = 0) this reduces further to EQ 25.
When the image plane tilt and the object plane tilt are equal (I e θ' = θ), and the image space and object space angular fields of view are equal (I e α' = α), EQ 22 reduces to EQ 26.
Matching the image plane tilt to the object plane tilt therefore yields a smaller required image sensor size than when the image sensor tilt is fixed at zero, and eliminates perspective distortion from the captured image Vanable image sensor tilt is, however, a relatively cotly option in practice, and also requires greater depth of field
Figure 63 illustrates the geometnc relationship, for a given roll-related tilt θ of the pen's optical axis, between the pen's nib (point A), the pen's optical axis (CE), and the field of view window (FH) The tilt is again defined to be clockwise positive from the vertical With the exception of EQ 13, the preceding equations apply equally to roll-induced tilt For roll-induced tilt the distance S from the mb to the center of the window (I e | AC | ) is zero rather than as defined by EQ 13
For pitch-induced tilt, the magnitude of the tilt range is maximised by choosing a minimum (negative) tilt and a maximum (positive) tilt which have the same image sensor requirement Since, for pitch-induced tilt, the surface is more distant for negative tilt than for positive tilt of the same magnitude, the minimum has a smaller magnitude than the maximum For roll-induced tilt they have the same magnitude
As descπbed above, the smallest features of the tag 4 are the structures which encode the data bits, and these have a minimum diameter of 8 dots This gives a maximum feature frequency /of about 7 9 per mm at 1600 dpi
As calculated according to EQ 4 above, an equilateral triangular tiling of 256-dot diameter tags with no overlap between successive lines of tags requires a minimum field of view window diameter on the surface of 598 dots, or about 9 5 mm at 1600 dpi
Most people hold a pen at about +30° pitch and 0° roll The inking ball of a ball-point mb loses effective contact with the surface beyond about +50° pitch (I e 40° from the honzontal) A reasonable target pitch range is therefore -10° to +50°, and a reasonable roll range -30° to +30°, beanng in mind greater limitations on combined pitch and roll as given by EQ 11 The highly compact (1 5 mm2) Matsushita CCD image sensor (Matsushita Electronic Coφoration, and is descπbed m a paper by Itakura, K T Nobusada, N Okusenya, R Nagayoshi, and M Ozaki, "A 1mm 50k-Pιxel IT CCD Image Sensor for Miniature Camera System", IEEE Transactions on Electronic Devices, Volt 47, number 1, January 2000) is suitable for use in a compact device such as a pen It has an available resolution of 215x215 pixels Assuming equal image and object space angular fields of view, no image plane tilt, and a nib-to-window distance T of 4 mm, optimizing the geometry using EQ 16 and EQ 24 to achieve the desired pitch and roll ranges stated above yields a pitch range of -16° to +48° (64°) and a roll range of -28° to +28° (56°) with a viewing distance D of 30 mm and an angular field of view of 18 8° (c = 9 4°) The available pitch range is actually -21° to +43°, and this is mapped to close to the desired range by pitching the optical axis at -5° relative to the physical axis Note that the tilt range can be expanded - 44 - shghdy by optimizing a non-zero tilt of the image plane
The overall pen tilt is thus confined to an elliptical cone whose major angle is 64° m the pitch plane and whose minor angle is 56° in the roll plane
The image sensing vanables are summanzed in Table 5 Table 5. Image sensing variables
Figure imgf000047_0001
8.3 TAG DECODING
8.3.1 Tag Image Processing and Decoding Tag image processing is descπbed earlier in Section 1 24 It culminates in knowledge of the 2D perspective transform on the tag, as well as the decoded tag data
8.3.2 Inferring the Pen Transform
Once the 2D perspective tiansform is obtained which accounts for the perspective distortion of the tag in the captured image, as descnbed earlier, the coπesponding discrete 3D tag ttansform with respect to the pen's optical axis can be infeπed, as descπbed below in Section 84
Once the discrete 3D tag transform is known, the conespondmg 3D pen transform can be mfened, l e the transform of the pen's physical axis with respect to the surface The pen's physical axis is the axis which is embodied in the pen's shape and which is expenenced by the pen's user It passes through the nib The relationship between the physical axis and the optical axis is illustrated in Figure 64 It is convenient to define three coordinate spaces In sensor space the optical axis coincides with the z axis and the the viewpoint is at the oπgin In pen space the physical axis coincides with the z axis and the nib is at the ongin In tag space the tag 4 lies in the x-y plane with Us center at the oπgin The tag transform ttansforms the tag 4 from tag space to sensor space
Sensor space is illustrated in Figure 64 The labelling of points Figure 64 is consistent with the labelling in - 45 -
Figure 62. The viewpoint is at E, the sensed point is at G, and the nib is at A. The intersection point G between the optical axis and the surface is refened to as the sensed point. In contrast with the geometry illustrated in Figure 62 where the nib is considered as a point, here the nib is considered as a small sphere. If the nib is curved, then the tilt of the physical axis affects the offset between the sensed point and the contact point between the nib and the surface. The center point K of the spherical nib, about which the physical axis pivots, is refened to as the pivot point.
The nib makes nominal contact with the surface at point A when the optical axis is vertical. KA is defined to be parallel to the optical axis. When the pen is tilted, however, contact is at point L, as shown in Figure 65. Given the radius R of the nib, the distance of the pivot point K from the surface, e.g. at A or L, is always R .
The discrete tag ttansform includes the translation of the tag center from the sensed point, the 3D tag rotation, and the translation of the sensed point from the viewpoint.
Given the translation d of the sensed point from the viewpoint in the discrete tag ttansform, and according to EQ 14, the sensed point is given by EQ 27.
Since the physical axis only differs from the optical axis by a y translation and x rotation (i.e. pitch), the physical axis lies in the y-z plane. With reference to Figure 64, where | AC | = S and | EC I = D (just as in Figure 62), it is clear that in sensor space the position of the pivot point is given by EQ 28.
The vector from the sensed point to the pivot point is therefore given by EQ 29.
The vector from the pivot point to the contact point is by definition a surface normal of length R. It is constructed by applying the 3D tag rotation M to a tag space surface normal, normalizing the result, and scaling by R, as shown in EQ 30 and EQ 31. The vector from the sensed point to the contact point is then obtained in accordance with EQ 32.
This is transformed into tag space by applying the inverse of the tag transform 3D rotation, and is then added to the vector from the tag center to the sensed point, to yield the vector from the tag center to the contact point in tag space, i.e. on the surface, in accordance with EQ 33.
This is finally added to the tag's absolute location, as implied by its tag ID, to yield the nib's desired absolute location in the tagged region: see EQ 34.
The final step is to infer the pen's 3D orientation from the tag's 3D orientation. The pen's discrete rotations are simply the inverses of the tag's discrete rotations, with the pen's pitch also including the effect of the pitch (φ-m∞-) of the optical axis with respect to the pen's axis, as defined in EQ 35, EQ 36 and EQ 37. 8.4 INFERRING THE TAG TRANSFORM The image of the tag 4 captured by the image sensor contains perspective distortion due to the position and orientation of the image sensor with respect to the tag. Once the perspective targets of the tag are found in image space, an eight-degree-of-freedom perspective ttansform is infened based on solving the well-understood equations relating the four tag-space and image-space point pairs. The discrete transform steps which give rise to the image of the tag are concatenated symbolically, and a set of simultaneous non-linear equations is obtained by equating conespondmg terms in the concatenated transform and the perspective ttansform. Solving these equations yields the discrete transform steps, which include the desired tag offset from the nib, 3D tag rotation, and viewpoint offset from the surface. 8.4.1 Modeling the Tag Transform
The transform of the tag 4 from tag space to image space can be modeled as a concatenation of the following transform steps: • x-y translate (by tag-to-viewpoint offset)
• z rotate (by tag yaw)
• x rotate (by tag pitch)
• y rotate (by tag roll) - 46 -
• z translate >y tag-to-viewpoint offset)
• perspective project (with specified focal length)
• x-y scale (to viewport size)
These are concatenated symbolically to produce a single transform matnx which effects the tag transform Table 7 summanzes the discrete transform vanables used in the following sections, together with the range of each vanable
Table 7. Discrete transform variables and their ranges
Figure imgf000049_0001
Translate in x-y plane by tx and ty according to EQ 42 (where A=tx and B=ty)
Rotate about z by γ according to EQ 43 (where C=cos(γ) and __>=sιn(γ)), giving EQ 44
Rotate about x by φ according to EQ 45 (where £=cos(φ) and F=sm(φ)), giving EQ 46
Rotate about y by ψ according to EQ 47 (where G=cos(ψ) and //=sm(ψ)), giving EQ 48, where K and are defined by EQ 49 and EQ 50
Translate in z by .- according to EQ 51 (where /=.-), giving EQ 52.
Perspective project with focal length λ and projection plane at z=0 according to EQ 53 (where J=\/k), giving EQ 54.
Scale to viewport by 5 according to EQ 55, giving EQ 56.
Transform a point in the x-y plane (z=0) according to EQ 57, giving EQ 58.
Finally, expand K and L, giving EQ 59. 8.4.2 2D Perspective Transform
Given an mfened eight-degree-of-freedom 2D perspective transform matnx as defined in EQ 60, multiply by an unknown / to obtain the general mne-degree-of- freedom form of the matnx, as shown in EQ 61
Transform a 2D point according to EQ 62, giving EQ 63 - 47 -
8.4.3 Inferring the Tag Transform
8.4.3.1 Equating Coefficients
Equating the coefficients in EQ 59 with the coefficients in EQ 63 results in EQ 64 to EQ 72, being nine non-linear equations in 11 unknowns These equations are augmented as required by the tngonometπc identity relating the sine and cosine of an angle (I e the sine and cosine of any one of yaw, pitch and roll), as shown in EQ 73
Given the sine and cosine of an angle, the conespondmg angle is obtained using a two-argument arctan as shown in EQ 74
8.4.3.2 Solving for X-Y Offset
EQ 66 can be simplified using EQ 64 and EQ 65 to give EQ 75 and then EQ 76 EQ 69 can be simplified using EQ 67 and EQ 68 to give EQ 77 and then EQ 78 EQ 72 can be simplified using EQ 70 and EQ 71 to give EQ 79 and then EQ 80 EQ 76 can be re-wntten as EQ 81, and EQ 78 can be re-wπtten as EQ 82 Equating EQ 81 and EQ 82 and solving for B yields EQ 83 through EQ 85 and finally EQ 86, which defines B Substituting the value for B into EQ 82 and simplifying yields EQ 87 through EQ 90 and finally EQ 91 , which defines A
This therefore gives the x-y offset of the tag 4 from the viewpoint, since A=tx and B=ty
8.4.3.3 Solving for Pitch From EQ 68, EQ 92 can be obtained
From EQ 67, EQ 93 can be obtained
From EQ 64, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 94 can be obtained
From EQ 65, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 95 can be obtained
From EQ 70, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 96 can be obtained From EQ 71, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 97 can be obtained
From EQ 94, EQ 98 can be obtained
From EQ 95, EQ 99 can be obtained
From EQ 96, EQ 100 can be obtained
From EQ 97, EQ 101 can be obtained From EQ 98 and EQ 99, EQ 102 and then EQ 103 can be obtained
From EQ 100 and EQ 101, EQ 104 and then EQ 105 can be obtained
From EQ 103 and EQ 105, EQ 106 and then EQ 107 can be obtained
EQ 107 only has a valid basis if G and H are both non-zero Since |ψ| < π/2, the cosine (G) of the roll is always positive and hence non-zero The sine of the roll (H) is only non-zero if the roll is non-zero Specific handling for zero pitch and roll is descnbed in Section 67 3 10
This therefore gives the magnitude of the sine of the pitch, since F=sιn(φ), and hence the cosine (E) of the pitch by EQ 73, according to EQ 108
Since |φ| < π/2, the cosine (E) of the pitch is always positive, so there is no ambiguity when taking the square root The sign of the sine (F), however, must be determined by other means, as descnbed in Section 67 3 9 Given E and F, the pitch is then obtained, according to EQ 109
8.4.3.4 Solving for Roll
From EQ 103, EQ 110 can be obtained
From EQ 73, EQ 111 and then EQ 112 can be obtained - 48 -
This therefore gives the magnitude of the sine of the roll, since //=sιn(ψ), and hence the cosine (G) of the roll by EQ 73, according to EQ 113
Since |ψ| < π/4, the cosine (G) of the roll is always positive, so there is no ambiguity when taking the square root The sign of the sine (FT), however, must be determined by other means, as descnbed in Section 67 3 9 Given G and H, the roll is then obtained accordmg to EQ 114
8.4.3.5 Solving for Yaw
From EQ 73, EQ 92 and EQ 93, EQ 115 and then EQ 116 can be obtained From EQ 92 and EQ 116, EQ 117 and then EQ 118 can be obtained From EQ 92 and EQ 116, EQ 119 and then EQ 120 can be obtained In EQ 116, and hence EQ 118 and EQ 120, the sign of the square root is determined by the sign of i, which can be determined from EQ 80, giving EQ 121
Since I (/-) is negative, J (1/λ) is positive, and IJ < -1 (because |/z| > λ), then EQ 122 holds Given C and D, the yaw is then obtained according to EQ 123
8.4.3.6 Solving for Viewport Scale The cosine (C) and sine (D) of the yaw are by definition never simultaneously zero Since the cosine (£) of the pitch is never zero, either EQ 67 or EQ 68 can therefore always be used to determine the viewport scale (5) If D is non-zero, then from EQ 67, EQ 124 can be obtained Otherwise, if C is non-zero, then from EQ 68, EQ 125 can be obtained
8.4.3.7 Solving for Focal Length Similarly, since the cosine (G) of the roll is never zero, either EQ 70 or EQ 71 can be used to determine the inverse focal length (J), so long as either the pitch or roll is non-zero However, the signs of the sines (F and H) of the pitch and roll may not be known However, the sign of the product (FH) of the sines of the pitch and roll is given by EQ 103, as shown in EQ 126
The sign can be assigned arbittanly to F, since the sign of J is known a pnon If gi is non-zero, then from EQ 70, EQ 127 can be obtained
If hi is non-zero, then from EQ 71, EQ 128 can be obtained
In practice, the choice between using EQ 127 and EQ 128 is based on which of gi and hi has the larger magnitude The inverse focal length is unknown if gi and hi are both zero, l e if the pitch and roll are both zero
8.4.3.8 Solving for Z Offset Once the inverse focal length (J) is known, the z offset (7) is obtained from EQ 80, according to EQ 129
Again, the z offset (7) is unknown if the inverse focal length (J) is unknown, l e if the pitch and roll are both zero
8.4.3.9 Determining Direction of Pitch and Roll
The sign of the product (FH) of the sines of the pitch and roll is given by EQ 126 Since -π/4 < ψ < π/4, a roll adjustment of +π/4 can be introduced to ensure the roll is always positive, without invalidating any other assumptions Once the roll adjustment is introduced, EQ 126 gives the sign of the sine (F) of the pitch alone
The roll adjustment is introduced as follows The viewport scale (S), inverse focal length (J), and z offset (/) are all computed as descnbed A 3D transform matnx is created from the 2D perspective ttansform matnx The inverses of the viewport scale, focal length projection and z translation are applied to the 3D matnx in reverse order The roll adjustment is then applied by pre-multiplying the matnx by a π/4 y rotation matnx The roll, pitch and yaw are computed as descnbed Since the roll is positive, the pitch direction is now known The π/4 roll adjustment is finally subtracted from the roll to give the actual roll
When the roll and pitch are both zero, the focal length and z offset are both unknown as descnbed above - 49 -
However, in this case there is no need to adjust the roll since the pitch and roll are already known. 8.4.3.10 Handling Zero Pitch and Roll
When either the pitch or roll is zero, the general solution based on EQ 107 becomes invalid. The table of Figure 85 shows the 12 degenerate forms of EQ 64 through EQ 71 which result when the yaw is variously zero (or π), π/2 (or 3π/2), and non-zero, and the pitch and roll are variously zero and non-zero. The table of Figures 86 and 87 sets out the required logic for detecting and handling cases where the pitch and/or roll are zero, with each case motivated by zeros appearing in the table of Figure 85. The cases in the table of Figure 85 are labelled with the case numbers from the table of Figures 86 and 87. CONCLUSION The present invention has been described with reference to a prefened embodiment and number of specific alternative embodiments. However, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the relevant fields that a number of other embodiments, differing from those specifically described, will also fall within the spirit and scope of the present invention. Accordingly, it will be understood that the invention is not intended to be limited to the specific embodiments described in the present specification, including documents incorporated by cross-reference as appropriate. The scope of the invention is only limited by the attached claims.

Claims

- 50 - CLAIMS
1 A method of enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system via an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and a sensing device which, when placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, uses at least some of the coded data to sense indicating data indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensmg device relative to the interface surface, the method including the steps of, in the computer system (a) receiving the indicating data from the sensing device,
(b) using the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operating the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
2 A method according to claim 1, wherein the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, and step (b) mcludes using the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
3 A method according to claim 2, wherein the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data, the method including the step of receiving, in the computer system, the movement data, wherein step (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
4 A method of enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system, the method including the steps of providing an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software, and coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and in the computer system
(a) receiving indicating data from a sensing device, the indicating data being indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, the indicative data being sensed when the sensing device is placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data, (b) using the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operating the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
5 A method according to claim 4, wherem the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, and step (b) includes using the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
6 A method according to claim 5, wherein the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface, using at least some of the coded data, the method including the step of receiving, in the computer system, the movement data, wherein the step of identifying the at least one interactive element includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
7 A method according to claim 1 or 4, where the interactive element is a hyperlink element relating to the computer software, the method including the step of effecting, the computer system, an operation associated with the hyperlink element
8 A method accordmg to claim 7, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the - 51 - computer software indicative of the hyperlink element
9 A method according to claim 8, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of a name and/or value of at least one field related to the computer software
10 A method according to claim 7, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of a selected object
11 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the interactive element is a checkbox field relating to the computer software, the method including the steps of identifying, in the computer system, that the user has entered a hand- drawn mark by means of the sensing device and effecting, in the computer system, an operation associated with the checkbox field 12 A method according to claim 11, including the step of associating, in the computer system, a true value with the checkbox field
13 A method according to claim 11, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of at least the checkbox field
14 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the interactive element is a text field relating to the computer software, the method including the steps of identifying, in the computer system, that the user has entered handwntten text data by means of the sensing device and effecting, m the computer system, an operation associated with the text field
15 A method according to claim 14, including the step of converting, in the computer system, the handwntten text data to computer text 16 A method according to claim 15, including the step of associating, in the computer system, the computer text with the text field
17 A method accordmg to claim 14, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of at least the text field
18 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the interactive element is a signature field relating to the computer software, the method including the steps of identifying, m the computer system, that the user has entered a handwntten signature by means of the sensing device and effecting, in the computer system, an operation associated with the signature field
19 A method according to claim 18, including the step of venfying, in the computer system, that the signature is that of the user 20 A method according to claim 19, including the step of generating, in the computer system and using a signature key of the user, a digital signature of at least data indicative of a name and/or value of at last one field related to the computer software
21 A method according to claim 20, including the step of associating, in the computer system, the digital signature with the signature field 22 A method according to claim 18, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of at least the signature field
23 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the interactive element is a drawing field related to the computer software, the method including the steps of identifying, in the computer system, that the user has entered a hand- drawn picture by means of the sensing device and effecting, in the computer system, an operation associated with the drawing field
24 A method according to claim 23, including the step of activating, in the computer system, a hyperlink
25 A method accordmg to claim 23 or 24, including the step of sending, in the computer system, data to the computer software indicative of at least the drawing field
26 A method according to claim 1 or 4, including the step of pπnting the interface surface on demand - 52 -
27 A method according to claim 26, including the step of substantially simultaneously pnnting the interface surface and the coded data onto a substrate
28 A method according to claim 27, wherein the coded data is pπnted onto the surface to be substantially invisible to an unaided human eye 29 A method according to claim 1 or 4, including the step of retaining a retnevable record of each interface surface pπnted, the interface surface being retnevable using the identity contained in its associated coded data
30 A method according to claim 1 or 4, including the step of distributing a plurality of the interface surfaces using a mixture of multicast and pomtcast communications protocols
31 A method according to claim 1 or 4, the sensing device containing an identification means that imparts a unique identity to the sensing device and identifies it as belonging to a particular user, wherein the method includes the step of monitonng, m the computer system, said identity
32 A method according to claim 1 or 4, including the step of providing sufficient coded data relating to the computer software in the interface surface to eliminate the need for a separate display device
33 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the interface surface is pnnted on multiple pages, the method including the step of binding the pages
34 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the coded data includes at least one tag, each tag bemg indicative of the identity of the region and the position of the tag with the region
35 A method according to claim 34, wherein each of the tags include first identity data defining a relative position of that tag, and second identity data identifying the surface
36 A method according to claim 35, wherein the surface is defined by a substrate
37 A method according to claim 36, wherein the substrate is laminar
38 A method according to claim 35, wherem the tags are disposed at predetermined positions on the surface 39 A method according to claim 38, wherein the tags are disposed on the surface within a tessellated pattern compπsmg a plurality of tiles, each of the tiles containing a plurality of the tags
40 A method according to claim 39, wherein the tiles interlock with each other to substantially cover the surface
41 A method according to claim 40, wherein the tiles are all of a similar shape 42 A method according to claim 41 , wherein the tiles are triangular, square, rectangular or hexagonal
43 A method according to claim 39, wherem the tags are disposed stochastically within each of the tiles
44 A method according to claim 35, wherein each of the tags includes at least one common feature in addition to the second identity data.
45 A method according to claim 44, wherein at least one common feature is configured to assist finding and or recognition of the tags by associated tag reading apparatus
46 A method according to claim 44, wherein the at least one common feature is represented format incoφorating redundancy of information
47 A method according to claim 46, wherem the at least one common feature is rotationally symmetπc so as to be rotationally mvanant 48 A method according to claim 46, wherein the at least one common feature is πng-shaped
49 A method according to claim 35, wherein each of the tags includes at least one oπentation feature for enabling a rotational oπentation of the tag being read to be ascertained
50 A method according to claim 49, wherein the at least one oπentation feature is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information - 53 -
51 A method according to claim 50, where the at least one onentation feature is rotationally asymmetric
52 A method according to claim 50, wherein the at least one oπentation featme is skewed along its major
53 A method according to claim 35, wherein each of the tags includes at least one perspective feature for enabling a perspective distortion of the tag being read to be ascertained
54 A method according to claim 53, wherein the at least one perspective feature includes at least four sub-features which are not coincident
55 A method according to claim 35, wherein each tag includes a plurality of tag elements, the first and second identity data each being defined by a plurality of the elements
56 A method according to claim 55, wherein the tag elements are disposed m one or more arcuate bands around a central region of each tag
57 A method according to claim 56, wherein there are a plurality of the arcuate bands disposed concentπcally with respect to each other 58 A method according to claim 57, wherein each element takes the form of a dot having a plurality of possible values
59 A method according to claim 58, wherein the number of possible values is two
60 A method according to claim 58, wherein when representing one of the possible values, the tag elements absorb, reflect or fluoresce electromagnetic radiation of a predetermined wavelength or range of wavelengths to a predetermined greater or lesser extent than the surface
61 A method according to claim 58, wherein the possible values of the tag elements are defined by different relative absoφtion, reflection or fluorescence of electtomagnetic radiation of a predetermined wavelength or range of wavelengths
62 A method according to claim 58, wherein the tags are not substantially visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions
63 A method according to claim 58, wherein the tags are slightly visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions
64 A method according to claim 58, wherein the tags are visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions 65 A method according to claim 35, wherem the first identity data is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information
66 A method according to claim 35, wherein the second identity data is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information
67 A method according to claim 34, wherem the tags are pnnted onto the surface by means of a pπnter 68 A method according to claim 67, wherein the pπnter is an ink pπnter
69 A method according to claim 68, wherein the tags are pπnted using ink that is absorbent or reflective in the ultraviolet spectrum or the infrared spectrum
70 A method according to claim 67, wherein the pπnter also pnnts additional information onto the surface 71 A method according to claim 70, wherein the additional information is pπnted onto the surface using colored or monochrome inks
72 A method according to claim 71, wherein the additional information is pπnted onto the surface using one of the following combinations of colored inks
CMY, - 54 -
CMYK, CMYRGB, and spot colour
73 A method according to claim 34, wherein at least a plurality of the tags are disposed stochastically upon the surface
74 A method according to claim 34, wherein the tags are disposed in a regular aπay on the surface
75 A method according to claim 74, wherein the aπay is tπangular
76 A method according to claim 74, wherein the aπay is rectangular
77 A method according to claim 75, wherein the tags are tiled over the surface 78 A method according to claim 34 further including additional non-tag information disposed on the surface
79 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein the region is identified with sufficient precision to distinguish the region from 1015 other regions
80 A method according to claim 1 or 4, wherein any 10 millimetre diameter subregion of the region includes sufficient coded data to identify the region
81 A method according to claim 80, wherein any 10 millimetre subregion of the region includes sufficient coded data to identify at least one point of the region
82 A system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system via an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, and a sensing device which, when placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, uses at least some of the coded data to sense indicating data indicative of the identity of the interface surface, and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, the system being configured to, in the computer system (a) receive the indicating data from the sensing device,
(b) use the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and
(c) operate the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element 83 A system according to claim 82, wherem the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, the system being configured to use the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
84 A system according to claim 83, wherein the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface using at least some of the coded data, the computer system being configured to receive the movement data, wherein (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element
85 A system according to claim 82, further including the sensing device
86 A system for enabling user interaction with computer software running in a computer system, the system including an interface surface containing information relating to the computer software and including coded data indicative of an identity of the interface surface and of at least one reference point of the interface surface, the system being configured to, m the computer system
(a) receive indicating data from a sensing device, the indicating data being indicative of the identity of the interface surface and a position of the sensing device relative to the interface surface, wherein the sensing device, when - 55 - placed in an operative position relative to the interface surface, senses the indicating data using at least some of the coded data;
(b) use the indicating data to identify at least one interactive element relating to the computer software, and (c) operate the computer software in accordance with instructions associated with the at least one interactive element
87 A system according to claim 86, wherein the interactive element is associated with a zone of the interface surface, the system being configured to use the position of the sensing device to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element 88 A system according to claim 87, wherein the sensing device generates movement data indicative of its movement relative to the interface surface using at least some of the coded data, the computer system being configured to receive the movement data, wherein (b) includes using the movement data to identify the zone and thereby the interactive element.
89 A system according to claim 86, further including the sensing device 90 A system according to claim 82 or 86, wherein the interactive element is a hyperlink element relating to the computer software, the computer system being configured to effect an operation associated with the hyperlink element
91 A system according to claim 90, wherein the computer system is configured to send, to the computer software, data indicative of the hyperlink element 92 A system according to any one of claims 82 or 86, the computer being configured to send, to the computer software, data indicative of a name and/or value of at least one field related to the computer software
93 A system according to any one of claims 82 or 86, the computer being configured to send, to the computer software, data indicative of a selected object
94 A system according to claim 82 or 86, wherein the interactive element is a checkbox field relating to the computer software, the computer system being configured to identify that the user has entered a hand-drawn mark by means of the sensing device, and effect an operation associated with the checkbox field
95 A system according to claim 94, wherem the computer system is configured to associate a true value with the checkbox field 96 A system according to 95, wherein the computer system is configured to send data to the computer software indicative of at least the checkbox field
97 A system according to claim 84 or 86, wherem the interactive element is a text field relating to the computer software, the computer system being configured to identify that the user has entered handwntten text data by means of the sensing device, and effect an operation associated with the text field
98 A system according to claim 97, the computer system being configured to convert the handwntten text data to computer text
99 A system according to claim 98, the computer system being configured to associate the computer text with the text field 100 A system according to 97, the computer system being configured to send data to the computer software indicative of at least the text field
101 A system according to 81 or 86, wherein the interactive element is a signature field relating to the computer software, the computer system being configured to identify that the user has entered a handwntten signature by means of the sensing device, and - 56 - effect an operation associated with the signature field
102. A system according to claim 101, the computer system being configured to venfy that the signature is that of the user.
103. A system according to claim 102, the computer system being configured to use a signature key associated with the user to generate a digital signature of at least data indicative of a name and/or value of at last one field related to the computer software.
104. A system according to claim 103, the computer system being configured to associate the digital signature with the signature field
105. A system according to claim 101, the computer system being configured to send, to the computer software, data indicative of at least the signature field
106. A system according to any one of claims 82 and 86, wherem the interactive element is a drawing field related to the computer software, the computer system being configured to: identify that the user has entered a hand-drawn picture by means of the sensing device; and effect an operation associated with the drawing field 107. A system according to method of claim 106, wherein the computer system is configured to activate a hyperlink.
108 A system according to claim 107, the computer system being configured to send, to the computer software, data indicative of at least the drawing field
109 A system according to claim 84 or 86, further including the sensing device, wherein the sensing device includes a marking nib
110. A system according to claim 84 or 86, further including the sensing device, wherein the sensing device contains identifying data indicative of an identity of the user
111 A system according to claim 110, the computer system being configured to monitor the identifying data when the sensing device is in use 112 A system according to claim 82 or 86, the computer system including a pπnter to pπnt the information onto the interface surface on demand
113. A system according to claim 112, the computer system being configured to substantially simultaneously pπnt the information and the coded data onto the interface surface
114 A system according to claim 82 or 86, wherein the coded data is substantially invisible to an unaided human eye.
115. A system according to claim 82 or 86, the computer system being configured to retain a retnevable record of each interface surface pnnted, the interface surface being retnevable usmg the identity contained in its associated coded data.
116 A system according to claim 82 or 86, the information being sufficiently detailed in relation to the computer software that a user can interact with the computer system without the need for a separate display device
117 A system according to claim 82 or 86, the system being configured to distπbute a plurality of the interface surfaces using a mixture of multicast and pomtcast communications protocols
118 A system according to claim 112, where the pnnter includes a binding mechanism for binding multiple interface surfaces, defined by multiple coπesponding pages, into a bound document 119. A system according to claim 82 or 86, wherein the coded data includes at least one tag, each tag being indicative of the identity of the region and the position of the tag withm the region
120 A system according to claim 119, wherein each of the tags include first identity data defining a relative position of that tag; and second identity data identifying the surface - 57 -
121 A system according to claim 120, wherein the surface is defined by a substrate
122 A system according to claim 121, wherein the substrate is laminar
123 A system according to claim 119, wherein the tags are disposed at predetermined positions on the surface 124 A system according to claim 123, wherein the tags are disposed on the surface within a tessellated pattern compπsing a plurality of tiles, each of the tiles containing a plurality of the tags
125 A system according to claim 124, wherein the tiles interlock with each other to substantially cover the surface
126 A system according to claim 125, wherein the tiles are all of a similar shape 127 A system according to claim 126, wherein the tiles are tnangular, square, rectangular or hexagonal
128 A system according to claim 124, wherein the tags are disposed stochastically within each of the tiles
129 A system according to claim 120, wherein each of the tags includes at least one common feature in addition to the second identity data
130 A system accordmg to claim 129, wherein the at least one common feature is configured to assist finding and/or recognition of the tags by associated tag reading apparatus
131 A system according to claim 129, wherein the at least one common feature is represented format incoφorating redundancy of information
132 A system according to claim 131, wherein the at least one common feature is rotationally symmetric so as to be rotationally mvanant 133 A system according to claim 132, wherein the at least one common feature is πng-shaped
134 A system according to claim 119, wherem each of the tags includes at least one oπentation feature for enabling a rotational oπentation of the tag being read to be ascertained
135 A system according to claim 134, wherein the at least one onentation feature is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information 136 A system according to claim 135, wherein the at least one onentation feature is rotationally asymmetnc
137 A system according to claim 136, wherein the at least one oπentation feature is skewed along its major
138 A system according to claim 119, wherem each of the tags includes at least one perspective feature for enabling a perspective distortion of the tag being read to be ascertained
139 A system according to claim 138, wherein the at least one perspective feature includes at least four sub-features, the relative positions of which define a non-degenerate quadrilateral
140 A system according to claim 120, wherein each tag includes a plurality of tag elements, the first and second identity data each being defined by a plurality of the elements 141 A system according to claim 140, wherein the tag elements are disposed in one or more arcuate bands around a central region of each tag
142 A system according to claim 141, wherein there are a plurality of the arcuate bands disposed concentπcally with respect to each other
143 A system according to claim 123, wherein each element takes the form of a dot having a plurality of possible values
144 A system according to claim 143, wherein the number of possible values is two
145 A system according to claim 143, wherein when representing one of the possible values, the tag elements absorb, reflect or fluoresce electromagnetic radiation of a predetermined wavelength or range of wavelengths to a predetermined greater or lesser extent than the surface - 58 -
146 A system according to claim 143, wherein the possible values of the tag elements are defined by different relative absoφtion, reflection or fluorescence of electromagnetic radiation of a predetermined wavelength or range of wavelengths
147 A system according to claim 143, wherein the tags are not substantially visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions
148 A system according to claim 143, wherem the tags are slightly visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions
149 A system according to claim 143, wherein the tags are visible to an average unaided human eye under daylight or ambient lighting conditions 150 A system according to claim 120, wherein the first identity data is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information
151 A system according to claim 120, wherein the second identity data is represented in a format incoφorating redundancy of information
152 A system according to claim 119, wherein the tags are pnnted onto the surface by means of a pnnter 153 A system according to claim 152, wherein the pπnter is an mk pπnter
154 A system according to claim 153, wherein the tags are pπnted using ink that is absorbent or reflective m the ultraviolet spectrum or the infrared spectrum
155 A system according to claim 152, wherein the pπnter also pnnts additional information onto the surface 156 A system according to claim 155, wherein the additional information is pnnted onto the surface using colored or monochrome inks
157 A system according to claim 156, wherein the additional information is pπnted onto the surface using one of the following combinations of colored inks
CMY, CMYK,
CMYRGB, and spot colour
158 A system according to claim 119, wherein at least a plurality of the tags are disposed stochastically upon the surface 159 A system according to claim 158, wherein the tags are disposed in a regular anay on the surface
160 A system according to claim 159, wherein the anay is tπangular
161 A system according to claim 159, wherem the aπay is rectangular
162 A system according to claim 159, wherein the tags are tiled over the surface
163 A system according to claim 119, further including additional non-tag information disposed on the surface
164 A system according to claim 82, 86 or 119, wherein the region is identified with sufficient precision to distinguish the region from 1015 other regions
165 A system according to claim 82, 86 or 119, wherem any 10 millimetre diameter subregion of the region includes sufficient coded data to identify the region 166 A system according to claim 165, wherein any 10 millimetre subregion of the region includes sufficient information to identify at least one point of the region
167 A method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, 35, 38 to 43, 55 to 64 or 67, wherem the coded data is machine readable and the information represented by the coded data is substantially inscrutable to an unaided human
168 A system according to any one of claims 82 to 88, 113, 119 to 124, 140 to 149 and 152, wherein the - 59 - coded data is machine readable and the information represented by the coded data is substantially inscrutable to an unaided human.
169. A system according to any one of claims 1 to 3, 35, 36, 38, 51 or 52, wherein the sensing device senses the indicating data indicative of the position of the sensing device also using an offset position of the sensing device relative to the at least some coded data.
170. A system according to claim 169, wherein the sensing device is an optical sensing device and it determines the offset position from a location of the at least some coded data in a field of view of the sensing device.
171. A system according to claim 170, wherein the sensing device also determines the offset position from perspective distortion of the at least some coded data in the field of view. 172. A system according to claim 170, wherein the sensing device also determines the offset position from a relationship between the sensing device and the field of view.
173. A method according to any one of claims 82 to 84, 119, 120, 123, 136 or 137, wherein the sensing device senses the indicating data indicative of the position of the sensing device also using an offset position of the sensing device relative to the at least some coded data. 174. A method according to claim 173, wherein the sensing device is an optical sensing device and it determines the offset position from a location of the at least some coded data in a field of view of the sensing device.
175. A method according to claim 174, wherein the sensing device also determines the offset position from perspective distortion of the at least some coded data in the field of view.
176. A method according to claim 174, wherein the sensing device also determines the offset position from a relationship between the sensing device and the field of view.
PCT/AU2000/000569 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points WO2000072130A1 (en)

Priority Applications (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU47304/00A AU4730400A (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
CA2374716A CA2374716C (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
DE60040610T DE60040610D1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 COMPUTER SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH REFERENCE POINTS
IL14667200A IL146672A0 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
JP2000620457A JP4647794B2 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Method for enabling interaction with computer software in a computer system and computer system thereof
BR0010861-8A BR0010861A (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
MXPA01012144A MXPA01012144A (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points.
EP00929081A EP1228418B1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
IL146672A IL146672A (en) 1999-05-25 2001-11-22 Computer system interface surface with reference points
HK03100899.9A HK1048860A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2003-02-07 Computer system interface surface with reference points

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AUPQ0559 1999-05-25
AUPQ0559A AUPQ055999A0 (en) 1999-05-25 1999-05-25 A method and apparatus (npage01)
AUPQ1313 1999-06-30
AUPQ1313A AUPQ131399A0 (en) 1999-06-30 1999-06-30 A method and apparatus (NPAGE02)
AUPQ3457A AUPQ345799A0 (en) 1999-10-15 1999-10-15 Tagged surface
AUPQ3457 1999-10-15
AUPQ4392 1999-12-01
AUPQ4392A AUPQ439299A0 (en) 1999-12-01 1999-12-01 Interface system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2000072130A1 true WO2000072130A1 (en) 2000-11-30

Family

ID=27424494

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/AU2000/000569 WO2000072130A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface with reference points
PCT/AU2000/000568 WO2000072249A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Identity-coded surface with reference points
PCT/AU2000/000571 WO2000072110A2 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface
PCT/AU2000/000570 WO2000072250A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Identity-coded surface

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/AU2000/000568 WO2000072249A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Identity-coded surface with reference points
PCT/AU2000/000571 WO2000072110A2 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Computer system interface surface
PCT/AU2000/000570 WO2000072250A1 (en) 1999-05-25 2000-05-24 Identity-coded surface

Country Status (15)

Country Link
US (30) US7233320B1 (en)
EP (4) EP1222502B1 (en)
JP (4) JP4638057B2 (en)
KR (4) KR100761053B1 (en)
CN (5) CN1210644C (en)
AT (3) ATE411555T1 (en)
AU (4) AU4730600A (en)
BR (4) BR0010861A (en)
CA (5) CA2371968C (en)
DE (3) DE60040003D1 (en)
HK (2) HK1048382A1 (en)
IL (10) IL146671A0 (en)
MX (4) MXPA01012118A (en)
SG (2) SG122801A1 (en)
WO (4) WO2000072130A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001041003A1 (en) 1999-12-01 2001-06-07 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Sensing device for coded electronic ink surface
EP1621986A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-01 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Calibrating digital pens
EP2203808A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2010-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd Printer driver for interactive printer
EP2159736A3 (en) * 2008-08-28 2010-12-22 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Image processing apparatus, image processing method and image processing program

Families Citing this family (238)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AUPQ055999A0 (en) * 1999-05-25 1999-06-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd A method and apparatus (npage01)
AUPQ582900A0 (en) * 2000-02-24 2000-03-16 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printed media production
US8352400B2 (en) 1991-12-23 2013-01-08 Hoffberg Steven M Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore
US6546112B1 (en) * 1993-11-18 2003-04-08 Digimarc Corporation Security document with steganographically-encoded authentication data
US7313251B2 (en) 1993-11-18 2007-12-25 Digimarc Corporation Method and system for managing and controlling electronic media
US7555139B2 (en) * 1995-05-08 2009-06-30 Digimarc Corporation Secure documents with hidden signals, and related methods and systems
US7724920B2 (en) 1995-05-08 2010-05-25 Digimarc Corporation Digital authentication with analog documents
US7966078B2 (en) 1999-02-01 2011-06-21 Steven Hoffberg Network media appliance system and method
US20070055884A1 (en) 1999-05-19 2007-03-08 Rhoads Geoffrey B User control and activation of watermark enabled objects
US7123239B1 (en) * 1999-05-25 2006-10-17 Paul Lapstun Computer system control with user data via interface surface
AUPQ363299A0 (en) * 1999-10-25 1999-11-18 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Paper based information inter face
US7233320B1 (en) * 1999-05-25 2007-06-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Computer system interface surface with reference points
AU2002952259A0 (en) 2002-10-25 2002-11-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Methods and apparatus
US7710408B2 (en) * 1999-08-30 2010-05-04 Anoto Ab Centralized information management based upon position information
SE517445C2 (en) * 1999-10-01 2002-06-04 Anoto Ab Position determination on a surface provided with a position coding pattern
US7322524B2 (en) * 2000-10-20 2008-01-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Graphic design software using an interface surface
US7503493B2 (en) * 1999-10-25 2009-03-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method and system for digitizing freehand graphics with user-selected properties
US7558598B2 (en) 1999-12-01 2009-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Dialling a number via a coded surface
US20030061188A1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2003-03-27 Linus Wiebe General information management system
US7089211B1 (en) * 2000-01-12 2006-08-08 Cisco Technology, Inc. Directory enabled secure multicast group communications
US20020050982A1 (en) * 2000-04-05 2002-05-02 Petter Ericson Data form having a position-coding pattern detectable by an optical sensor
US6854821B2 (en) 2000-04-05 2005-02-15 Anoto Ab Systems and methods for printing by using a position-coding pattern
US8903950B2 (en) 2000-05-05 2014-12-02 Citrix Systems, Inc. Personalized content delivery using peer-to-peer precaching
US7657128B2 (en) * 2000-05-23 2010-02-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Optical force sensor
US7000230B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-02-14 Microsoft Corporation Network-based software extensions
US6948135B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2005-09-20 Microsoft Corporation Method and systems of providing information to computer users
US7155667B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-12-26 Microsoft Corporation User interface for integrated spreadsheets and word processing tables
US7346848B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2008-03-18 Microsoft Corporation Single window navigation methods and systems
US6883168B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2005-04-19 Microsoft Corporation Methods, systems, architectures and data structures for delivering software via a network
US7624356B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2009-11-24 Microsoft Corporation Task-sensitive methods and systems for displaying command sets
US7191394B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2007-03-13 Microsoft Corporation Authoring arbitrary XML documents using DHTML and XSLT
JP4317334B2 (en) * 2000-09-08 2009-08-19 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and document management system
US6722574B2 (en) 2000-09-07 2004-04-20 Anoto Ab Business card
US10915296B2 (en) 2000-11-01 2021-02-09 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Information apparatus that includes a touch sensitive screen interface for managing or replying to e-mails
AU2002243279A1 (en) 2000-11-01 2002-06-18 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Controller and manager for device-to-device pervasive digital output
US10860290B2 (en) 2000-11-01 2020-12-08 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Mobile information apparatuses that include a digital camera, a touch sensitive screen interface, support for voice activated commands, and a wireless communication chip or chipset supporting IEEE 802.11
US9965233B2 (en) 2000-11-20 2018-05-08 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Digital content services or stores over the internet that transmit or stream protected or encrypted digital content to connected devices and applications that access the digital content services or stores
US11204729B2 (en) 2000-11-01 2021-12-21 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Internet based digital content services for pervasively providing protected digital content to smart devices based on having subscribed to the digital content service
US7127682B2 (en) 2000-11-10 2006-10-24 Anoto Ab Device and system for information management utilizing a filing appliance
US7167164B2 (en) 2000-11-10 2007-01-23 Anoto Ab Recording and communication of handwritten information
US7333947B2 (en) * 2000-11-13 2008-02-19 Anoto Ab Network-based system
US7002559B2 (en) 2000-11-13 2006-02-21 Anoto Ab Method, system and product for information management
US7493250B2 (en) * 2000-12-18 2009-02-17 Xerox Corporation System and method for distributing multilingual documents
US20020097419A1 (en) 2001-01-19 2002-07-25 Chang William Ho Information apparatus for universal data output
US7958359B2 (en) 2001-04-30 2011-06-07 Digimarc Corporation Access control systems
US7502937B2 (en) * 2001-04-30 2009-03-10 Digimarc Corporation Digital watermarking security systems
US7916124B1 (en) 2001-06-20 2011-03-29 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. Interactive apparatus using print media
US6776945B2 (en) * 2001-07-03 2004-08-17 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Medical device with extruded member having helical orientation
US7039234B2 (en) * 2001-07-19 2006-05-02 Microsoft Corporation Electronic ink as a software object
TWI235926B (en) * 2002-01-11 2005-07-11 Sonix Technology Co Ltd A method for producing indicators and processing system, coordinate positioning system and electronic book system utilizing the indicators
JP4102105B2 (en) * 2002-05-24 2008-06-18 株式会社日立製作所 Document entry system using electronic pen
US8370420B1 (en) 2002-07-11 2013-02-05 Citrix Systems, Inc. Web-integrated display of locally stored content objects
CN1695156B (en) 2002-09-26 2010-07-21 吉田健治 Information reproduction/i/o method using dot pattern, information reproduction device, mobile information i/o device, and electronic toy
AU2002952106A0 (en) * 2002-10-15 2002-10-31 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Methods and systems (npw008)
SE523931C2 (en) * 2002-10-24 2004-06-01 Anoto Ab Information processing system arrangement for printing on demand of position-coded base, allows application of graphic information and position data assigned for graphical object, to substrate for forming position-coded base
US7133563B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-11-07 Microsoft Corporation Passive embedded interaction code
US7257278B2 (en) * 2003-02-26 2007-08-14 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Image sensor for capturing and filtering image data
US7415672B1 (en) 2003-03-24 2008-08-19 Microsoft Corporation System and method for designing electronic forms
US7370066B1 (en) 2003-03-24 2008-05-06 Microsoft Corporation System and method for offline editing of data files
US7913159B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2011-03-22 Microsoft Corporation System and method for real-time validation of structured data files
US7296017B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2007-11-13 Microsoft Corporation Validation of XML data files
JP4142982B2 (en) * 2003-05-13 2008-09-03 株式会社Pfu Image reading device
JP4240293B2 (en) * 2003-05-27 2009-03-18 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント Multimedia playback apparatus and multimedia playback method
WO2004107132A2 (en) 2003-05-28 2004-12-09 Caymas Systems, Inc. Method, system and software for state signing of internet resources
US7210629B2 (en) * 2003-06-05 2007-05-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Portable communication device
JP2005010863A (en) * 2003-06-16 2005-01-13 Toho Business Kanri Center:Kk Terminal equipment, display system, display method, program and recording medium
US7451392B1 (en) 2003-06-30 2008-11-11 Microsoft Corporation Rendering an HTML electronic form by applying XSLT to XML using a solution
US7406660B1 (en) 2003-08-01 2008-07-29 Microsoft Corporation Mapping between structured data and a visual surface
US7334187B1 (en) 2003-08-06 2008-02-19 Microsoft Corporation Electronic form aggregation
JP2005070828A (en) * 2003-08-22 2005-03-17 Canon Inc Data structure, processing method of structured document described in its data structure, program for executing its method, and storage medium storing its program
US20050060644A1 (en) * 2003-09-15 2005-03-17 Patterson John Douglas Real time variable digital paper
JP2005094275A (en) * 2003-09-17 2005-04-07 Ricoh Co Ltd Copy propriety discriminating apparatus, image reading apparatus, scanner apparatus, facsimile machine, copying machine, and composite machine
CN1867894A (en) * 2003-10-15 2006-11-22 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Automatic generation of user interface descriptions through sketching
US20050125717A1 (en) * 2003-10-29 2005-06-09 Tsakhi Segal System and method for off-line synchronized capturing and reviewing notes and presentations
SE0303058D0 (en) 2003-11-18 2003-11-18 Anoto Ab Methods and arrangements in an information management system
JP4150923B2 (en) * 2003-12-09 2008-09-17 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Data output system and method
US7583842B2 (en) * 2004-01-06 2009-09-01 Microsoft Corporation Enhanced approach of m-array decoding and error correction
US7707039B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2010-04-27 Exbiblio B.V. Automatic modification of web pages
US8442331B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2013-05-14 Google Inc. Capturing text from rendered documents using supplemental information
US8819072B1 (en) 2004-02-02 2014-08-26 Microsoft Corporation Promoting data from structured data files
US7164811B2 (en) * 2004-02-09 2007-01-16 Northrop Grumman Corporation Pocket-pen ultra-high resolution MEMS projection display in combination with on-axis CCD image capture system including means for permitting 3-D imaging
US7812860B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2010-10-12 Exbiblio B.V. Handheld device for capturing text from both a document printed on paper and a document displayed on a dynamic display device
US10635723B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2020-04-28 Google Llc Search engines and systems with handheld document data capture devices
US7983835B2 (en) 2004-11-03 2011-07-19 Lagassey Paul J Modular intelligent transportation system
US20060078866A1 (en) * 2004-03-17 2006-04-13 James Marggraff System and method for identifying termination of data entry
US7831933B2 (en) 2004-03-17 2010-11-09 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. Method and system for implementing a user interface for a device employing written graphical elements
US7853193B2 (en) 2004-03-17 2010-12-14 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. Method and device for audibly instructing a user to interact with a function
US20060066591A1 (en) * 2004-03-17 2006-03-30 James Marggraff Method and system for implementing a user interface for a device through recognized text and bounded areas
US20060098900A1 (en) 2004-09-27 2006-05-11 King Martin T Secure data gathering from rendered documents
US7894670B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2011-02-22 Exbiblio B.V. Triggering actions in response to optically or acoustically capturing keywords from a rendered document
US9116890B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2015-08-25 Google Inc. Triggering actions in response to optically or acoustically capturing keywords from a rendered document
US20060081714A1 (en) 2004-08-23 2006-04-20 King Martin T Portable scanning device
US9008447B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2015-04-14 Google Inc. Method and system for character recognition
US7990556B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2011-08-02 Google Inc. Association of a portable scanner with input/output and storage devices
US8081849B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2011-12-20 Google Inc. Portable scanning and memory device
US9143638B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2015-09-22 Google Inc. Data capture from rendered documents using handheld device
US8146156B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2012-03-27 Google Inc. Archive of text captures from rendered documents
WO2008028674A2 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-03-13 Exbiblio B.V. Optical scanners, such as hand-held optical scanners
US8713418B2 (en) 2004-04-12 2014-04-29 Google Inc. Adding value to a rendered document
US8874504B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2014-10-28 Google Inc. Processing techniques for visual capture data from a rendered document
US8489624B2 (en) 2004-05-17 2013-07-16 Google, Inc. Processing techniques for text capture from a rendered document
US8620083B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2013-12-31 Google Inc. Method and system for character recognition
US7296747B2 (en) * 2004-04-20 2007-11-20 Michael Rohs Visual code system for camera-equipped mobile devices and applications thereof
US7048198B2 (en) * 2004-04-22 2006-05-23 Microsoft Corporation Coded pattern for an optical device and a prepared surface
GB2413419B (en) * 2004-04-23 2007-12-27 Hewlett Packard Development Co Digital pen system
GB2413678B (en) * 2004-04-28 2008-04-23 Hewlett Packard Development Co Digital pen and paper
US7496837B1 (en) 2004-04-29 2009-02-24 Microsoft Corporation Structural editing with schema awareness
US20050254100A1 (en) * 2004-05-17 2005-11-17 Venali, Inc. Ticket exchange for combating fax spam
US7281018B1 (en) 2004-05-26 2007-10-09 Microsoft Corporation Form template data source change
US7774620B1 (en) 2004-05-27 2010-08-10 Microsoft Corporation Executing applications at appropriate trust levels
US20050289453A1 (en) * 2004-06-21 2005-12-29 Tsakhi Segal Apparatys and method for off-line synchronized capturing and reviewing notes and presentations
US7284192B2 (en) 2004-06-24 2007-10-16 Avaya Technology Corp. Architecture for ink annotations on web documents
KR20060000743A (en) * 2004-06-29 2006-01-06 삼성전자주식회사 Method for printing a barcode and apparatus therefor, and method for generating a barcode print command and apparatus therefor
US8346620B2 (en) 2004-07-19 2013-01-01 Google Inc. Automatic modification of web pages
US7702750B2 (en) 2004-09-29 2010-04-20 Citrix Systems, Inc. System and method for event detection and re-direction over a network using a presentation level protocol
US8069226B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2011-11-29 Citrix Systems, Inc. System and method for data synchronization over a network using a presentation level protocol
US7765221B2 (en) * 2004-09-30 2010-07-27 Sap Ag Normalization of a multi-dimensional set object
US7692636B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2010-04-06 Microsoft Corporation Systems and methods for handwriting to a screen
US20060087497A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Borgaonkar Shekhar R Digital pen for capturing hand-drawn data
US7712022B2 (en) 2004-11-15 2010-05-04 Microsoft Corporation Mutually exclusive options in electronic forms
US7584417B2 (en) * 2004-11-15 2009-09-01 Microsoft Corporation Role-dependent action for an electronic form
US7721190B2 (en) 2004-11-16 2010-05-18 Microsoft Corporation Methods and systems for server side form processing
US7904801B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2011-03-08 Microsoft Corporation Recursive sections in electronic forms
US7937651B2 (en) 2005-01-14 2011-05-03 Microsoft Corporation Structural editing operations for network forms
US7545272B2 (en) 2005-02-08 2009-06-09 Therasense, Inc. RF tag on test strips, test strip vials and boxes
RO121497B1 (en) * 2005-02-09 2007-06-29 Softwin S.R.L. Information system and method for the acquisition, analysis and authentication of holograph signature
US7826074B1 (en) 2005-02-25 2010-11-02 Microsoft Corporation Fast embedded interaction code printing with custom postscript commands
JP4556705B2 (en) * 2005-02-28 2010-10-06 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Two-dimensional coordinate identification apparatus, image forming apparatus, and two-dimensional coordinate identification method
US7725834B2 (en) 2005-03-04 2010-05-25 Microsoft Corporation Designer-created aspect for an electronic form template
US8229252B2 (en) 2005-03-18 2012-07-24 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Electronic association of a user expression and a context of the expression
US7809215B2 (en) 2006-10-11 2010-10-05 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Contextual information encoded in a formed expression
US7873243B2 (en) 2005-03-18 2011-01-18 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Decoding digital information included in a hand-formed expression
US8102383B2 (en) * 2005-03-18 2012-01-24 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Performing an action with respect to a hand-formed expression
US8787706B2 (en) 2005-03-18 2014-07-22 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Acquisition of a user expression and an environment of the expression
US8340476B2 (en) * 2005-03-18 2012-12-25 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Electronic acquisition of a hand formed expression and a context of the expression
US8232979B2 (en) * 2005-05-25 2012-07-31 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Performing an action with respect to hand-formed expression
US8823636B2 (en) 2005-03-18 2014-09-02 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Including environmental information in a manual expression
US7791593B2 (en) * 2005-03-18 2010-09-07 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Machine-differentiatable identifiers having a commonly accepted meaning
US8290313B2 (en) * 2005-03-18 2012-10-16 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Electronic acquisition of a hand formed expression and a context of the expression
US8010515B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2011-08-30 Microsoft Corporation Query to an electronic form
US7421439B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2008-09-02 Microsoft Corporation Global metadata embedding and decoding
CA2606135C (en) 2005-04-28 2015-06-30 Kenji Yoshida Information input/output method using dot pattern
US7400777B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2008-07-15 Microsoft Corporation Preprocessing for information pattern analysis
US7729539B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2010-06-01 Microsoft Corporation Fast error-correcting of embedded interaction codes
US8200975B2 (en) 2005-06-29 2012-06-12 Microsoft Corporation Digital signatures for network forms
US20070005645A1 (en) * 2005-06-29 2007-01-04 Xerox Corporation Printing system and method with local printer for locally searching, selecting and printing from remote database
US7619607B2 (en) * 2005-06-30 2009-11-17 Microsoft Corporation Embedding a pattern design onto a liquid crystal display
JP3771252B1 (en) 2005-07-01 2006-04-26 健治 吉田 Dot pattern
EP1907987A4 (en) 2005-07-25 2010-11-10 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Product item having coded data identifying a layout
JP4539479B2 (en) * 2005-07-27 2010-09-08 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Medium management system, image forming apparatus, medium management method, and program
US7922099B1 (en) 2005-07-29 2011-04-12 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. System and method for associating content with an image bearing surface
US7770220B2 (en) * 2005-08-16 2010-08-03 Xerox Corp System and method for securing documents using an attached electronic data storage device
US7817816B2 (en) 2005-08-17 2010-10-19 Microsoft Corporation Embedded interaction code enabled surface type identification
JP4687324B2 (en) * 2005-08-18 2011-05-25 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information processing apparatus and association method
US7621442B2 (en) 2005-09-19 2009-11-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing a subscription using a mobile device
US7672664B2 (en) * 2005-09-19 2010-03-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing a reminder list using mobile device
US7756526B2 (en) 2005-09-19 2010-07-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Retrieving a web page via a coded surface
US7558597B2 (en) * 2005-09-19 2009-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Retrieving a ringtone via a coded surface
US8078578B2 (en) * 2005-10-14 2011-12-13 Cisco Technology, Inc. Sharing of presence-based time-zone information
US8001459B2 (en) 2005-12-05 2011-08-16 Microsoft Corporation Enabling electronic documents for limited-capability computing devices
US7904876B1 (en) * 2006-03-01 2011-03-08 The Mathworks, Inc. Interactive graphics format model
JP4042065B1 (en) * 2006-03-10 2008-02-06 健治 吉田 Input processing system for information processing device
US8150163B2 (en) 2006-04-12 2012-04-03 Scanbuy, Inc. System and method for recovering image detail from multiple image frames in real-time
US7570250B2 (en) * 2006-05-04 2009-08-04 Yi-Ming Tseng Control device including a ball that stores data
DE202007019222U1 (en) * 2006-05-16 2011-03-17 Silicon Sensor International Ag System with a medical gamma probe and a control unit
JP4188388B2 (en) * 2006-06-08 2008-11-26 株式会社東芝 Form processing system, form processing method, program, and optical reading form
US8261967B1 (en) 2006-07-19 2012-09-11 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. Techniques for interactively coupling electronic content with printed media
EP1936585A1 (en) * 2006-12-23 2008-06-25 NTT DoCoMo, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatically identifying regions of interest in a digital map
US8416188B2 (en) * 2007-02-08 2013-04-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd System for controlling movement of a cursor on a display device
WO2008102373A2 (en) * 2007-02-23 2008-08-28 Ravikiran Sureshbabu Pasupulet A method and system for close range communication using concetric arcs model
EP2130110B1 (en) 2007-03-23 2014-10-08 Anoto AB Printing of a position-coding pattern
US8276069B2 (en) * 2007-03-28 2012-09-25 Honeywell International Inc. Method and system for automatically generating an adaptive user interface for a physical environment
US9507375B2 (en) 2007-06-05 2016-11-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and method for recognizing location
EP2179351A4 (en) * 2007-07-10 2013-03-27 Anoto Ab System, software module and methods for creating a response to input by an electronic pen
US8271864B2 (en) * 2007-07-10 2012-09-18 Anoto Ab Electronic representations of position-coded products in digital pen systems
TW200920096A (en) * 2007-08-01 2009-05-01 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Handheld printer
EP2215542B1 (en) * 2007-11-26 2013-03-20 Anoto AB Printing of position-coded documents
US20090149235A1 (en) * 2007-12-06 2009-06-11 Leviathan Entertainment Paying Royalties Based on Content Usage in a Trivia Game
US7874496B2 (en) * 2008-01-04 2011-01-25 Microsoft Corporation Optically readable tag
KR100976571B1 (en) * 2008-06-27 2010-08-17 국민대학교산학협력단 Information service code and data service method thereof
US20090327923A1 (en) * 2008-06-30 2009-12-31 Yahoo! Inc. Automated system and method for creating a web site based on a subject using information available on the internet
US8867779B2 (en) * 2008-08-28 2014-10-21 Microsoft Corporation Image tagging user interface
US8396246B2 (en) * 2008-08-28 2013-03-12 Microsoft Corporation Tagging images with labels
US8442620B2 (en) * 2008-10-01 2013-05-14 Pacesetter, Inc. Implantable lead/electrode delivery measurement and feedback system
US20100086236A1 (en) * 2008-10-02 2010-04-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of imaging position-coding pattern having tag coordinates encoded by successive subsequences of cyclic position code
US10943030B2 (en) * 2008-12-15 2021-03-09 Ibailbonding.Com Securable independent electronic document
DE202010018601U1 (en) 2009-02-18 2018-04-30 Google LLC (n.d.Ges.d. Staates Delaware) Automatically collecting information, such as gathering information using a document recognizing device
US20100218249A1 (en) * 2009-02-25 2010-08-26 Microsoft Corporation Authentication via a device
CN102349087B (en) 2009-03-12 2015-05-06 谷歌公司 Automatically providing content associated with captured information, such as information captured in real-time
US8447066B2 (en) 2009-03-12 2013-05-21 Google Inc. Performing actions based on capturing information from rendered documents, such as documents under copyright
EP2425606B1 (en) 2009-05-02 2017-11-15 Citrix Systems, Inc. Methods and systems for providing a consistent profile to overlapping user sessions
US9417700B2 (en) 2009-05-21 2016-08-16 Edge3 Technologies Gesture recognition systems and related methods
US9081799B2 (en) 2009-12-04 2015-07-14 Google Inc. Using gestalt information to identify locations in printed information
US9323784B2 (en) 2009-12-09 2016-04-26 Google Inc. Image search using text-based elements within the contents of images
TWI413054B (en) * 2010-03-17 2013-10-21 Au Optronics Corp Driving apparatus for driving a display panel and source driver thereof
US8396252B2 (en) 2010-05-20 2013-03-12 Edge 3 Technologies Systems and related methods for three dimensional gesture recognition in vehicles
TW201145093A (en) * 2010-06-10 2011-12-16 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd Handheld input device
US20130109003A1 (en) * 2010-06-17 2013-05-02 Sang-gyu Lee Method for providing a study pattern analysis service on a network and a server used therewith
US8391604B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2013-03-05 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Camera-vision systems, used in collaboration whiteboards, for pre-formatted, reusable, annotatable, movable menus and forms
WO2012030872A1 (en) 2010-09-02 2012-03-08 Edge3 Technologies Inc. Method and apparatus for confusion learning
US8655093B2 (en) 2010-09-02 2014-02-18 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing segmentation of an image
US8666144B2 (en) 2010-09-02 2014-03-04 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining disparity of texture
US8582866B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2013-11-12 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for disparity computation in stereo images
US8970589B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2015-03-03 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Near-touch interaction with a stereo camera grid structured tessellations
US8811720B2 (en) * 2011-07-12 2014-08-19 Raytheon Company 3D visualization of light detection and ranging data
US9164603B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2015-10-20 Atmel Corporation Executing gestures with active stylus
US9672609B1 (en) 2011-11-11 2017-06-06 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for improved depth-map estimation
US20130163808A1 (en) * 2011-12-21 2013-06-27 Mark Gregory Clements Method and System of Digital Steganography
US8866769B2 (en) 2012-03-13 2014-10-21 Blackberry Limited Device cover with drawing pad input device
US9039483B2 (en) 2012-07-02 2015-05-26 Hallmark Cards, Incorporated Print-level sensing for interactive play with a printed image
WO2014017039A1 (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 パナソニック株式会社 Information reading device
US9031953B2 (en) * 2012-11-19 2015-05-12 Realnetworks, Inc. Method and system to curate media collections
US10753746B2 (en) 2012-11-29 2020-08-25 3M Innovative Properties, Inc. Multi-mode stylus and digitizer system
KR20140087716A (en) * 2012-12-31 2014-07-09 동우 화인켐 주식회사 System for verifying measurement result
JP2014194751A (en) * 2013-02-27 2014-10-09 Panasonic Corp Information acquisition device, display control system and biometric authentication system
US10721448B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-07-21 Edge 3 Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for adaptive exposure bracketing, segmentation and scene organization
US9824348B1 (en) 2013-08-07 2017-11-21 Square, Inc. Generating a signature with a mobile device
CN105122193B (en) 2013-08-16 2019-01-04 株式会社和冠 Indicate body detecting sensor and indication body detection device
WO2015022940A1 (en) 2013-08-16 2015-02-19 株式会社ワコム Indicator detection device and indicator detection method
CN104516650A (en) * 2013-09-27 2015-04-15 联想(北京)有限公司 Information processing method and electronic device
US9224030B2 (en) 2014-01-10 2015-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Sensor identification
US20150227897A1 (en) * 2014-02-11 2015-08-13 Anthony Loera Method of Making, Securing, and Using a Cryptocurrency Wallet
TWI601053B (en) 2014-02-12 2017-10-01 元太科技工業股份有限公司 Correction method of touch point and electromagnetic-type touch panel using the same
US11083880B2 (en) * 2014-07-25 2021-08-10 The Procter & Gamble Company Angled cartridge assembly for a dispensing device
USD762693S1 (en) 2014-09-03 2016-08-02 Apple Inc. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
EP3234230B1 (en) * 2014-12-19 2019-04-17 Weber-Hydraulik GmbH Method for optically inscribing and/or marking round stock
USD760740S1 (en) * 2015-01-23 2016-07-05 Your Voice Usa Corp. Display screen with icon
USD765098S1 (en) * 2015-03-06 2016-08-30 Apple Inc. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
US9639183B2 (en) 2015-04-20 2017-05-02 Wacom Co., Ltd. System and method for bidirectional communication between stylus and stylus sensor controller
WO2016170888A1 (en) 2015-04-20 2016-10-27 株式会社ワコム Method using active stylus and sensor controller, sensor controller, active stylus and system
EP4109224A1 (en) 2015-04-20 2022-12-28 Wacom Co., Ltd. System and method for bidirectional communication between stylus and stylus sensor controller
CN109359657B (en) 2015-10-19 2022-11-25 松翰科技股份有限公司 Index structure
US10474655B1 (en) * 2018-07-23 2019-11-12 Improbable Worlds Ltd Entity database
US11460931B2 (en) 2018-10-31 2022-10-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Recovering perspective distortions
CN109993255B (en) * 2019-03-15 2021-10-26 华南理工大学 Image coding and decoding method
US11380082B2 (en) * 2019-10-11 2022-07-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Electronic device, method and non-transitory storage medium for optical character recognition
CN111680749B (en) * 2020-06-08 2023-11-07 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Method and device for obtaining output result of dispenser
CA204308S (en) * 2020-12-21 2023-08-21 Hoffmann La Roche Display screen with graphical user interface

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2306669A (en) * 1995-11-01 1997-05-07 Ricoh Kk Manual entry interactive paper and electronic document handling and processing system
US5661506A (en) * 1994-11-10 1997-08-26 Sia Technology Corporation Pen and paper information recording system using an imaging pen
US5692073A (en) * 1996-05-03 1997-11-25 Xerox Corporation Formless forms and paper web using a reference-based mark extraction technique
JPH10194562A (en) * 1996-12-27 1998-07-28 Minolta Co Ltd Image forming device
US5852434A (en) * 1992-04-03 1998-12-22 Sekendur; Oral F. Absolute optical position determination
WO1999050787A1 (en) * 1998-04-01 1999-10-07 Xerox Corporation Cross-network functions via linked hardcopy and electronic documents
US6076734A (en) * 1997-10-07 2000-06-20 Interval Research Corporation Methods and systems for providing human/computer interfaces

Family Cites Families (133)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3999012A (en) 1975-07-07 1976-12-21 Ibm Corporation Graphic entry tablet with improved addressing
US4588862A (en) 1984-01-16 1986-05-13 Grabowy James G Visual display network interface
US4652412A (en) * 1985-06-14 1987-03-24 Polaroid Corporation Method for forming microporous filter
US4760606A (en) * 1986-06-30 1988-07-26 Wang Laboratories, Inc. Digital imaging file processing system
US4825058A (en) * 1986-10-14 1989-04-25 Hewlett-Packard Company Bar code reader configuration and control using a bar code menu to directly access memory
GB8624808D0 (en) * 1986-10-16 1986-11-19 Laser Impressions Ltd Identifying item of printed matter
US4864618A (en) * 1986-11-26 1989-09-05 Wright Technologies, L.P. Automated transaction system with modular printhead having print authentication feature
US4837563A (en) * 1987-02-12 1989-06-06 International Business Machine Corporation Graphics display system function circuit
JPS6423383A (en) * 1987-07-20 1989-01-26 Empire Airport Service Bar-code system
JPS6423383U (en) 1987-07-29 1989-02-07
US4906843A (en) * 1987-12-31 1990-03-06 Marq Technolgies Combination mouse, optical scanner and digitizer puck
US4998010A (en) * 1988-04-08 1991-03-05 United Parcel Service Of America, Inc. Polygonal information encoding article, process and system
US4937439A (en) * 1988-05-13 1990-06-26 National Computer Systems, Inc. Method and system for creating and scanning a customized survey form
US4932679A (en) * 1989-06-16 1990-06-12 Becker-Mayer Associates Children's books
US5051736A (en) * 1989-06-28 1991-09-24 International Business Machines Corporation Optical stylus and passive digitizing tablet data input system
US6158012A (en) * 1989-10-30 2000-12-05 Texas Instruments Incorporated Real-time power conservation and thermal management for computers
US5091966A (en) * 1990-07-31 1992-02-25 Xerox Corporation Adaptive scaling for decoding spatially periodic self-clocking glyph shape codes
US5340971A (en) 1990-09-17 1994-08-23 Metrologic Instruments, Inc. Automatic bar code reading system having selectable long range and short range modes of operation
GB9100732D0 (en) * 1991-01-14 1991-02-27 Xerox Corp A data access system
US5854621A (en) * 1991-03-19 1998-12-29 Logitech, Inc. Wireless mouse
DE69202975T2 (en) * 1991-04-03 1996-02-15 Hewlett Packard Co POSITIONING DEVICE.
US5223479A (en) 1991-08-01 1993-06-29 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Process for preparing alkali metal-doped fullerenes
US5323179A (en) * 1991-08-23 1994-06-21 Eastman Kodak Company Method of calibrating a multichannel printer
US5231293A (en) * 1991-10-31 1993-07-27 Psc, Inc. Bar code reading instrument which prompts operator to scan bar codes properly
US5369261A (en) * 1992-02-12 1994-11-29 Shamir; Harry Multi-color information encoding system
US5477012A (en) 1992-04-03 1995-12-19 Sekendur; Oral F. Optical position determination
KR940701567A (en) * 1992-04-06 1994-05-28 알프레드 피. 로렌조 Cordless electronic stylus, digitizer system and electronic organizer
AU668987B2 (en) 1992-09-28 1996-05-23 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Dot code and information recording/reproducing system for recording/reproducing dot code
US5291243A (en) * 1993-02-05 1994-03-01 Xerox Corporation System for electronically printing plural-color tamper-resistant documents
JPH06266490A (en) * 1993-03-12 1994-09-22 Toshiba Corp Information input device and position recognition system for information input
JP3262297B2 (en) * 1993-04-27 2002-03-04 株式会社ワコム Optical coordinate input device
US5450190A (en) * 1993-05-13 1995-09-12 Caribbean Microparticles Corp. Composition, method and apparatus for providing a coded hidden identification on a selected printable item by a coded printing composition
WO1995000440A1 (en) 1993-06-28 1995-01-05 William Marsh Rice University Solar process for making fullerenes
US5574790A (en) * 1993-09-27 1996-11-12 Angstrom Technologies, Inc. Fluorescence authentication reader with coaxial optics
US5841978A (en) * 1993-11-18 1998-11-24 Digimarc Corporation Network linking method using steganographically embedded data objects
US6681028B2 (en) * 1995-07-27 2004-01-20 Digimarc Corporation Paper-based control of computer systems
US6681029B1 (en) * 1993-11-18 2004-01-20 Digimarc Corporation Decoding steganographic messages embedded in media signals
JP3277052B2 (en) * 1993-11-19 2002-04-22 シャープ株式会社 Coordinate input device and coordinate input method
US5459307A (en) * 1993-11-30 1995-10-17 Xerox Corporation System for storage and retrieval of digitally encoded information on a medium
US5483052A (en) * 1993-12-07 1996-01-09 Smith, Iii; Herbert J. System for reading, storing and using bar-encoded data from a coded business card or other printed material
JP2591458B2 (en) 1993-12-21 1997-03-19 日本電気株式会社 Processing method of carbon nanotube
US5449896A (en) * 1993-12-22 1995-09-12 Xerox Corporation Random access techniques for use with self-clocking glyph codes
CN1104791A (en) * 1993-12-30 1995-07-05 富冈信 Two dimensional code for processing data
JPH07239745A (en) * 1994-02-28 1995-09-12 Toshiba Corp Information input device and position recognition system in information input
ES2105936B1 (en) * 1994-03-21 1998-06-01 I D Tec S L IMPROVEMENTS INTRODUCED IN INVENTION PATENT N. P-9400595/8 BY: BIOMETRIC PROCEDURE FOR SECURITY AND IDENTIFICATION AND CREDIT CARDS, VISAS, PASSPORTS AND FACIAL RECOGNITION.
US6302989B1 (en) * 1994-03-31 2001-10-16 Giesecke & Devrient Gmbh Method for producing a laminar compound for transferring optically variable single elements to objects to be protected
JPH07311813A (en) * 1994-05-17 1995-11-28 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Information reproducing device, method therefor and recording medium
US5932863A (en) * 1994-05-25 1999-08-03 Rathus; Spencer A. Method and apparatus for accessing electric data via a familiar printed medium
JPH07322012A (en) * 1994-05-27 1995-12-08 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Picture input/output device
US5687254A (en) 1994-06-06 1997-11-11 Xerox Corporation Searching and Matching unrecognized handwriting
EP0689141A3 (en) 1994-06-20 1997-10-15 At & T Corp Interrupt-based hardware support for profiling system performance
JPH082181A (en) * 1994-06-24 1996-01-09 Kenji Okayasu Controlling method for graphic lithography, the same lithography and waveform recorder
US5652412A (en) 1994-07-11 1997-07-29 Sia Technology Corp. Pen and paper information recording system
JPH0836452A (en) * 1994-07-21 1996-02-06 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Writing pen and writing pen device
US5640193A (en) * 1994-08-15 1997-06-17 Lucent Technologies Inc. Multimedia service access by reading marks on an object
JPH0869637A (en) * 1994-08-30 1996-03-12 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Information recording medium and information reproducing device of this information recording medium
US5974558A (en) 1994-09-02 1999-10-26 Packard Bell Nec Resume on pen contact
JP2952170B2 (en) * 1994-12-16 1999-09-20 オリンパス光学工業株式会社 Information reproduction system
US5586787A (en) * 1994-12-20 1996-12-24 Brown; Jerry W. Method and apparatus for prevention of register receipt falsification
US5554842A (en) * 1994-12-22 1996-09-10 Pitney Bowes Inc. Luminescent facing marks for enhanced postal indicia discrimination
US5611575A (en) * 1995-01-03 1997-03-18 Xerox Corporation Distributed state flags or other unordered information for embedded data blocks
JP3006482B2 (en) * 1995-05-12 2000-02-07 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information retrieval apparatus and method
GB2301734B (en) * 1995-05-31 1999-10-20 Motorola Ltd Communications system and method of operation
US5978773A (en) * 1995-06-20 1999-11-02 Neomedia Technologies, Inc. System and method for using an ordinary article of commerce to access a remote computer
US5828817A (en) * 1995-06-29 1998-10-27 Digital Equipment Corporation Neural network recognizer for PDLs
US5781914A (en) * 1995-06-30 1998-07-14 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Converting documents, with links to other electronic information, between hardcopy and electronic formats
US6311214B1 (en) * 1995-07-27 2001-10-30 Digimarc Corporation Linking of computers based on optical sensing of digital data
JPH0981711A (en) * 1995-09-20 1997-03-28 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Information recording medium, information reproduction system, and information recording the system
US5974455A (en) * 1995-12-13 1999-10-26 Digital Equipment Corporation System for adding new entry to web page table upon receiving web page including link to another web page not having corresponding entry in web page table
US5663748A (en) * 1995-12-14 1997-09-02 Motorola, Inc. Electronic book having highlighting feature
CA2190672C (en) * 1995-12-27 2000-05-23 Mark Jeffrey Foladare Communication system and method using two-way paging to provide call control
US5818026A (en) 1996-02-06 1998-10-06 Symbol Technologies, Inc. Hand-marked lottery selection slip scanning system and method
US6098882A (en) 1996-03-01 2000-08-08 Cobblestone Software, Inc. Variable formatting of digital data into a pattern
US6820807B1 (en) * 1996-03-01 2004-11-23 Cobblestone Software, Inc. Variable formatting of digital data into a pattern
JP3010136B2 (en) * 1996-03-28 2000-02-14 オリンパス光学工業株式会社 Code data output device
US6012102A (en) * 1996-04-02 2000-01-04 Infogear Technology Corporation System using machine-readable printed symbols created from encoded data resource specifiers to establish connection to data resource on data communications network
JPH09306030A (en) * 1996-05-10 1997-11-28 Sony Corp Recording medium
WO1998003923A1 (en) 1996-07-21 1998-01-29 Ernestine, Llc World wide web bar code access system
US5760916A (en) * 1996-09-16 1998-06-02 Eastman Kodak Company Image handling system and method
US5986651A (en) * 1996-09-23 1999-11-16 Motorola, Inc. Method, system, and article of manufacture for producing a network navigation device
US5940595A (en) * 1996-09-23 1999-08-17 Motorola, Inc. Electronic network navigation device and method for linking to an electronic address therewith
US6106110A (en) * 1996-10-09 2000-08-22 Nocopi Technologies, Inc. Secure thermal ink jet printing composition and substrate and method and apparatus utilizing same
US6386453B1 (en) * 1996-11-25 2002-05-14 Metrologic Instruments, Inc. System and method for carrying out information-related transactions
JPH10171758A (en) * 1996-12-06 1998-06-26 Neolex:Kk Www file reading system using bar code
US6157935A (en) * 1996-12-17 2000-12-05 Tran; Bao Q. Remote data access and management system
CH690720A5 (en) 1996-12-18 2000-12-29 Eidgenoess Tech Hochschule Nanotubes, use of such nanotubes as well as methods for their preparation.
US6594406B1 (en) * 1996-12-20 2003-07-15 Xerox Corporation Multi-level selection methods and apparatus using context identification for embedded data graphical user interfaces
US5937110A (en) * 1996-12-20 1999-08-10 Xerox Corporation Parallel propagating embedded binary sequences for characterizing objects in N-dimensional address space
JP3492874B2 (en) * 1996-12-26 2004-02-03 株式会社デンソーウェーブ Signature verification system
US5881352A (en) * 1996-12-27 1999-03-09 Minolta Co., Ltd. Image forming apparatus having a finisher
JPH10224540A (en) * 1997-02-05 1998-08-21 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Digital copying machine
JPH10285378A (en) * 1997-03-28 1998-10-23 Internatl Business Mach Corp <Ibm> Copying device and control method therefor
US6148331A (en) * 1997-04-25 2000-11-14 Parry; Rhys Evan Destination website access and information gathering system
US6039257A (en) * 1997-04-28 2000-03-21 Pitney Bowes Inc. Postage metering system that utilizes secure invisible bar codes for postal verification
US6036094A (en) * 1997-06-13 2000-03-14 Symbol Technologies, Inc. Hand-held optical scanner for reading two-dimensional bar code symbols and the like
US6308207B1 (en) * 1997-09-09 2001-10-23 Ncr Corporation Distributed service subsystem architecture for distributed network management
US6411994B2 (en) 1997-10-07 2002-06-25 Interval Research Corporation Interface system for providing content using context hotspots
WO1999019823A2 (en) 1997-10-10 1999-04-22 Interval Research Corporation Methods and systems for providing human/computer interfaces
US6050490A (en) * 1997-10-31 2000-04-18 Hewlett-Packard Company Handheld writing device and related data entry system
US6234078B1 (en) * 1997-12-10 2001-05-22 Monarch Marking Systems, Inc. Ink roller assembly having a plurality of sections each having a porous sleeve
WO1999034277A2 (en) 1997-12-24 1999-07-08 Interval Research Corporation Printable interfaces and digital linkmarks
US6260114B1 (en) * 1997-12-30 2001-07-10 Mcmz Technology Innovations, Llc Computer cache memory windowing
JPH11219405A (en) * 1998-02-02 1999-08-10 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Information reproducing system
US6144371A (en) * 1998-03-18 2000-11-07 International Business Machines Corporation Thinkscribe combined electronic and paper based scheduling
US6330976B1 (en) * 1998-04-01 2001-12-18 Xerox Corporation Marking medium area with encoded identifier for producing action through network
US5995193A (en) * 1998-05-01 1999-11-30 Eastman Kodak Company Self-contained device for recording data encoded either in visible or invisible form
US6021196A (en) * 1998-05-26 2000-02-01 The Regents University Of California Reference palette embedding
JP2935263B1 (en) * 1998-06-10 1999-08-16 株式会社スキャンテクノロジー Rotary body code recognition system and method
US6279013B1 (en) * 1998-07-20 2001-08-21 Xerox Corporation Interactive newspaper
US6964374B1 (en) * 1998-10-02 2005-11-15 Lucent Technologies Inc. Retrieval and manipulation of electronically stored information via pointers embedded in the associated printed material
US6644764B2 (en) * 1998-10-28 2003-11-11 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Integrated printing/scanning system using invisible ink for document tracking
US6354501B1 (en) * 1998-11-18 2002-03-12 Crossoff Incorporated Composite authentication mark and system and method for reading the same
US6281888B1 (en) * 1999-01-07 2001-08-28 International Business Machines Corporation Pen input device using electrostatic coupling
US6448979B1 (en) * 1999-01-25 2002-09-10 Airclic, Inc. Printed medium activated interactive communication of multimedia information, including advertising
US6380930B1 (en) * 1999-03-09 2002-04-30 K-Tech Devices Corporation Laptop touchpad with integrated antenna
US6050607A (en) * 1999-03-26 2000-04-18 The Standard Register Company Security image element tiling scheme
US6314457B1 (en) * 1999-04-21 2001-11-06 Airclic, Inc. Method for managing printed medium activated revenue sharing domain name system schemas
US7233320B1 (en) * 1999-05-25 2007-06-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Computer system interface surface with reference points
SE516522C2 (en) * 1999-05-28 2002-01-22 Anoto Ab Position determining product for digitization of drawings or handwritten information, obtains displacement between symbol strings along symbol rows when symbol strings are repeated on symbol rows
US6502756B1 (en) * 1999-05-28 2003-01-07 Anoto Ab Recording of information
EP1059266A3 (en) 1999-06-11 2000-12-20 Iljin Nanotech Co., Ltd. Mass synthesis method of high purity carbon nanotubes vertically aligned over large-size substrate using thermal chemical vapor deposition
JP3905668B2 (en) 1999-08-06 2007-04-18 株式会社リコー Written recording system
US6542622B1 (en) * 1999-08-30 2003-04-01 Eastman Kodak Company Methods and articles for determining invisible ink print quality
SE517445C2 (en) * 1999-10-01 2002-06-04 Anoto Ab Position determination on a surface provided with a position coding pattern
US7028102B1 (en) * 1999-12-13 2006-04-11 Axis, Ab Method and system for presenting information
US6306736B1 (en) 2000-02-04 2001-10-23 The Regents Of The University Of California Process for forming shaped group III-V semiconductor nanocrystals, and product formed using process
US6225198B1 (en) 2000-02-04 2001-05-01 The Regents Of The University Of California Process for forming shaped group II-VI semiconductor nanocrystals, and product formed using process
US6560104B2 (en) * 2001-03-27 2003-05-06 Thermal Corp. Portable computer and docking station cooling
TW579019U (en) * 2001-06-13 2004-03-01 Eturbotouch Technology Inc Flexible current type touch film
US6608618B2 (en) * 2001-06-20 2003-08-19 Leapfrog Enterprises, Inc. Interactive apparatus using print media
US6667695B2 (en) * 2001-06-25 2003-12-23 Anoto Ab Position code
US6708894B2 (en) * 2001-06-26 2004-03-23 Xerox Corporation Method for invisible embedded data using yellow glyphs
US6959866B2 (en) * 2002-05-30 2005-11-01 Ricoh Company, Ltd. 2-Dimensional code pattern, 2-dimensional code pattern supporting medium, 2-dimensional code pattern generating method, and 2-dimensional code reading apparatus and method

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5852434A (en) * 1992-04-03 1998-12-22 Sekendur; Oral F. Absolute optical position determination
US5661506A (en) * 1994-11-10 1997-08-26 Sia Technology Corporation Pen and paper information recording system using an imaging pen
GB2306669A (en) * 1995-11-01 1997-05-07 Ricoh Kk Manual entry interactive paper and electronic document handling and processing system
US5692073A (en) * 1996-05-03 1997-11-25 Xerox Corporation Formless forms and paper web using a reference-based mark extraction technique
JPH10194562A (en) * 1996-12-27 1998-07-28 Minolta Co Ltd Image forming device
US6076734A (en) * 1997-10-07 2000-06-20 Interval Research Corporation Methods and systems for providing human/computer interfaces
WO1999050787A1 (en) * 1998-04-01 1999-10-07 Xerox Corporation Cross-network functions via linked hardcopy and electronic documents

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001041003A1 (en) 1999-12-01 2001-06-07 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Sensing device for coded electronic ink surface
EP1621986A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-01 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Calibrating digital pens
EP2203808A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2010-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd Printer driver for interactive printer
EP2203808A4 (en) * 2007-09-21 2012-08-08 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Printer driver for interactive printer
EP2159736A3 (en) * 2008-08-28 2010-12-22 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Image processing apparatus, image processing method and image processing program
US8260064B2 (en) 2008-08-28 2012-09-04 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Image processing apparatus, image processing method, computer-readable medium and computer data signal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US6843420B2 (en) 2005-01-18
US6789731B2 (en) 2004-09-14
EP1222502A4 (en) 2005-11-09
US20040217164A1 (en) 2004-11-04
JP4663132B2 (en) 2011-03-30
CA2625142A1 (en) 2000-11-30
CN1369072A (en) 2002-09-11
US7077333B2 (en) 2006-07-18
US20120237140A1 (en) 2012-09-20
BR0010861A (en) 2002-05-28
EP1222502A2 (en) 2002-07-17
CA2374716A1 (en) 2000-11-30
US7055739B1 (en) 2006-06-06
US7412651B2 (en) 2008-08-12
IL146674A0 (en) 2002-07-25
JP4638057B2 (en) 2011-02-23
US7861932B2 (en) 2011-01-04
EP1224617A1 (en) 2002-07-24
WO2000072110A2 (en) 2000-11-30
US7025276B2 (en) 2006-04-11
US7703675B2 (en) 2010-04-27
AU4730400A (en) 2000-12-12
DE60040610D1 (en) 2008-12-04
KR100761053B1 (en) 2007-09-21
US20050082361A1 (en) 2005-04-21
US20050052683A1 (en) 2005-03-10
US20130092732A1 (en) 2013-04-18
MXPA01012146A (en) 2003-07-28
US7057608B2 (en) 2006-06-06
US20100194844A1 (en) 2010-08-05
US7017823B2 (en) 2006-03-28
US7289103B2 (en) 2007-10-30
EP1224617A4 (en) 2003-10-01
US20030094492A1 (en) 2003-05-22
US20070283315A1 (en) 2007-12-06
CA2371968A1 (en) 2000-11-30
KR20020012243A (en) 2002-02-15
CN1310125C (en) 2007-04-11
MXPA01012118A (en) 2003-07-28
IL146673A (en) 2007-05-15
US20080245583A1 (en) 2008-10-09
WO2000072250A1 (en) 2000-11-30
US20030088468A1 (en) 2003-05-08
US8281982B2 (en) 2012-10-09
IL146671A0 (en) 2002-07-25
US20030095098A1 (en) 2003-05-22
US20050071313A1 (en) 2005-03-31
HK1048860A1 (en) 2003-04-17
US20030094497A1 (en) 2003-05-22
US6766944B2 (en) 2004-07-27
CA2371589C (en) 2009-05-19
CN1210644C (en) 2005-07-13
US7299969B2 (en) 2007-11-27
CA2374723C (en) 2012-04-10
IL146671A (en) 2008-06-05
EP1224617B1 (en) 2008-08-20
US7284701B2 (en) 2007-10-23
US20030128196A1 (en) 2003-07-10
US7469830B2 (en) 2008-12-30
BR0010845A (en) 2002-05-21
DE60040550D1 (en) 2008-11-27
JP2003500765A (en) 2003-01-07
US7080780B2 (en) 2006-07-25
US7134598B2 (en) 2006-11-14
HK1048382A1 (en) 2003-03-28
US20050094214A1 (en) 2005-05-05
JP4647794B2 (en) 2011-03-09
US7793852B2 (en) 2010-09-14
WO2000072249A1 (en) 2000-11-30
AU4730600A (en) 2000-12-12
IL180629A0 (en) 2007-06-03
DE60040003D1 (en) 2008-10-02
EP1222502B1 (en) 2008-10-15
CN1364277B (en) 2010-05-12
KR100674426B1 (en) 2007-01-25
AU4730500A (en) 2000-12-12
IL146672A0 (en) 2002-07-25
MXPA01012144A (en) 2003-07-28
US6983878B2 (en) 2006-01-10
IL203827A (en) 2013-08-29
CN1359505B (en) 2010-05-12
ATE412212T1 (en) 2008-11-15
JP2003500730A (en) 2003-01-07
CN1359505A (en) 2002-07-17
US20030089781A1 (en) 2003-05-15
CA2374716C (en) 2011-02-15
US20030094500A1 (en) 2003-05-22
CA2374723A1 (en) 2000-11-30
EP1224616A4 (en) 2004-09-29
IL146673A0 (en) 2002-07-25
US20050064503A1 (en) 2005-03-24
KR100742624B1 (en) 2007-07-25
WO2000072110A3 (en) 2001-11-15
BR0010858A (en) 2002-04-30
US20090066974A1 (en) 2009-03-12
US20030094496A1 (en) 2003-05-22
US20050167480A1 (en) 2005-08-04
SG122801A1 (en) 2006-06-29
CN1364254A (en) 2002-08-14
KR20020013562A (en) 2002-02-20
US20040217161A1 (en) 2004-11-04
US6830196B1 (en) 2004-12-14
EP1228418B1 (en) 2008-10-22
US7233320B1 (en) 2007-06-19
IL146674A (en) 2011-04-28
CN1193288C (en) 2005-03-16
EP1224616A1 (en) 2002-07-24
KR20020013550A (en) 2002-02-20
AU773812B2 (en) 2004-06-10
AU4730300A (en) 2000-12-12
EP1228418A4 (en) 2005-11-30
JP2003500764A (en) 2003-01-07
ATE411555T1 (en) 2008-10-15
EP1228418A1 (en) 2002-08-07
US20050064502A1 (en) 2005-03-24
US7134601B2 (en) 2006-11-14
CA2371589A1 (en) 2000-11-30
ATE405895T1 (en) 2008-09-15
US20040245345A1 (en) 2004-12-09
US7150396B2 (en) 2006-12-19
CN1364277A (en) 2002-08-14
IL146672A (en) 2009-11-18
IL180629A (en) 2010-12-30
US6832717B1 (en) 2004-12-21
MXPA01012063A (en) 2003-07-28
KR20020012244A (en) 2002-02-15
US20030085868A1 (en) 2003-05-08
JP2003500720A (en) 2003-01-07
BR0010846A (en) 2002-05-14
US7182247B1 (en) 2007-02-27
CN1680913A (en) 2005-10-12
CA2371968C (en) 2011-11-15
SG122802A1 (en) 2006-06-29
US6766945B2 (en) 2004-07-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2371589C (en) Identity-coded surface
EP1222645A1 (en) Orientation sensing device
EP1230588A1 (en) Computer system control via interface surface
WO2000072133A1 (en) Hand-drawing capture via interface surface
WO2001003017A1 (en) Method and system for user registration on terminal
AU2003254770B2 (en) Identity-coded surface with coded marks

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2000 620457

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2374716

Country of ref document: CA

Kind code of ref document: A

Ref document number: 2374716

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2001/012144

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 1020017015104

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2000929081

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 008101124

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020017015104

Country of ref document: KR

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2000929081

Country of ref document: EP

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 1020017015104

Country of ref document: KR